FCC ID: I88VMG1312B10C Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway with USB Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway without USB

VMG1312-B10C Wireless N VDSL2 4-port Gateway with USB Version 1.00 Edition 1, 10/2014 Quick Start Guide Users Guide Default Login Details LAN IP Address Login Password www.zyxel.com http://192.168.1.1 admin 1234 Copyright 2014 ZyXEL Communications Corporation IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the Device and get up and running right away. 2 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Users Guide .......................................................................................................................................15 Introducing the Device ............................................................................................................................17 The Web Configurator .............................................................................................................................23 Quick Start ...............................................................................................................................................31 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................33 Network Map and Status Screens ...........................................................................................................35 Broadband ...............................................................................................................................................39 Wireless ..................................................................................................................................................65 Home Networking ..................................................................................................................................101 Routing ..................................................................................................................................................125 Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................131 Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................................149 Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................................167 Interface Group .....................................................................................................................................171 USB Service ..........................................................................................................................................177 Firewall ..................................................................................................................................................183 MAC Filter .............................................................................................................................................193 Parental Control ....................................................................................................................................195 Scheduler Rule ......................................................................................................................................199 Certificates ............................................................................................................................................201 VPN .......................................................................................................................................................209 Log .......................................................................................................................................................221 Traffic Status ........................................................................................................................................225 ARP Table .............................................................................................................................................229 Routing Table ........................................................................................................................................231 IGMP Status .........................................................................................................................................233 xDSL Statistics ......................................................................................................................................235 3G Statistics .........................................................................................................................................239 User Account .........................................................................................................................................241 Remote Management ............................................................................................................................243 TR-069 Client ........................................................................................................................................245 TR-064 ..................................................................................................................................................247 Time Settings ........................................................................................................................................249 E-mail Notification .................................................................................................................................253 Logs Setting .........................................................................................................................................255 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................................259 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................261 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 3 Contents Overview Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................265 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................271 4 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3 Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5 Part I: Users Guide ......................................................................................... 15 Chapter 1 Introducing the Device .......................................................................................................................17 1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................17 1.2 Ways to Manage the Device .............................................................................................................17 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device ..............................................................................................17 1.4 Applications for the Device ...............................................................................................................18 1.4.1 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................18 1.4.2 Devices USB Support .............................................................................................................19 1.5 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................................20 1.6 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................20 1.7 Wireless Access ................................................................................................................................21 1.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button .................................................................................................21 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator ........................................................................................................................23 2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................23 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................23 2.2 Web Configurator Layout ..................................................................................................................25 2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................................25 2.2.2 Main Window ...........................................................................................................................26 2.2.3 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................27 Chapter 3 Quick Start...........................................................................................................................................31 3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................31 3.2 Quick Start Setup ..............................................................................................................................31 Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 33 Chapter 4 Network Map and Status Screens .....................................................................................................35 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 5 Table of Contents 4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................35 4.2 The Network Map Screen .................................................................................................................35 4.3 The Status Screen .............................................................................................................................36 Chapter 5 Broadband...........................................................................................................................................39 5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................39 5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................39 5.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................40 5.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................42 5.2 The Broadband Screen .....................................................................................................................42 5.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection ...................................................................................................44 5.3 The 3G Backup Screen .....................................................................................................................51 5.4 The Advanced Screen .......................................................................................................................55 5.5 The 8021x Screen .............................................................................................................................56 5.5.1 Edit 802.1X Settings ................................................................................................................57 5.6 The Ethernet WAN Screen ................................................................................................................57 5.7 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................58 Chapter 6 Wireless ...............................................................................................................................................65 6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................65 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................65 6.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................66 6.2 The General Screen .........................................................................................................................66 6.2.1 No Security ..............................................................................................................................69 6.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) ..........................................................................................................70 6.2.3 Basic (802.1X) .........................................................................................................................71 6.2.4 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) ....................................................................................................73 6.2.5 WPA(2) Authentication .............................................................................................................74 6.3 The More AP Screen .........................................................................................................................75 6.3.1 Edit More AP ..........................................................................................................................77 6.4 MAC Authentication ..........................................................................................................................78 6.5 The WPS Screen ..............................................................................................................................79 6.6 The WMM Screen .............................................................................................................................81 6.7 The WDS Screen ..............................................................................................................................82 6.7.1 WDS Scan ...............................................................................................................................83 6.8 The Others Screen ............................................................................................................................84 6.9 The Channel Status Screen ..............................................................................................................86 6.10 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................86 6.10.1 Wireless Network Overview ...................................................................................................86 6.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms .....................................................................................................88 6.10.3 Wireless Security Overview ...................................................................................................88 6 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Table of Contents 6.10.4 Signal Problems ....................................................................................................................91 6.10.5 BSS .......................................................................................................................................91 6.10.6 MBSSID .................................................................................................................................91 6.10.7 Preamble Type ......................................................................................................................92 6.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) .....................................................................................92 6.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) .................................................................................................93 Chapter 7 Home Networking .............................................................................................................................101 7.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................101 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................101 7.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................................102 7.1.3 Before You Begin ...................................................................................................................103 7.2 The LAN Setup Screen ...................................................................................................................103 7.3 The Static DHCP Screen .................................................................................................................107 7.4 The UPnP Screen ...........................................................................................................................108 7.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example .............................................................................................109 7.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ............................................................................................ 112 7.7 The Additional Subnet Screen ........................................................................................................ 118 7.8 The STB Vendor ID Screen ............................................................................................................. 119 7.9 The LAN VLAN Screen ...................................................................................................................120 7.10 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................120 7.10.1 LANs, WANs and the Device ...............................................................................................121 7.10.2 DHCP Setup ........................................................................................................................121 7.10.3 DNS Server Addresses .......................................................................................................121 7.10.4 LAN TCP/IP .........................................................................................................................122 Chapter 8 Routing ..............................................................................................................................................125 8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................125 8.2 The Routing Screen ........................................................................................................................126 8.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route .............................................................................................................127 8.3 The Policy Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................................127 8.3.1 Add/Edit Policy Forwarding ...................................................................................................129 8.4 RIP ..............................................................................................................................................129 8.4.1 The RIP Screen .....................................................................................................................130 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................131 9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................131 9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................131 9.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................................132 9.3 The Quality of Service General Screen ..........................................................................................133 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 7 Table of Contents 9.4 The Queue Setup Screen ...............................................................................................................134 9.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue ...........................................................................................................136 9.5 The Class Setup Screen .................................................................................................................136 9.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class ..............................................................................................................138 9.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen .......................................................................................................141 9.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer .........................................................................................................142 9.7 The QoS Monitor Screen ...............................................................................................................143 9.8 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................144 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................149 10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................149 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................149 10.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................149 10.2 The Port Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................................150 10.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding ...................................................................................................152 10.3 The Applications Screen ...............................................................................................................153 10.3.1 Add New Application ...........................................................................................................154 10.4 The Port Triggering Screen ...........................................................................................................155 10.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule .............................................................................................157 10.5 The DMZ Screen ...........................................................................................................................158 10.6 The ALG Screen ...........................................................................................................................158 10.7 The Address Mapping Screen .......................................................................................................159 10.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule ..........................................................................................160 10.8 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................161 10.8.1 NAT Definitions ....................................................................................................................161 10.8.2 What NAT Does ...................................................................................................................162 10.8.3 How NAT Works ..................................................................................................................163 10.8.4 NAT Application ...................................................................................................................164 Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................167 11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................167 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................167 11.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................168 11.2 The DNS Entry Screen ..................................................................................................................168 11.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry .............................................................................................................169 11.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................169 Chapter 12 Interface Group .................................................................................................................................171 12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................171 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................171 8 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Table of Contents 12.2 The Interface Group Screen ..........................................................................................................171 12.2.1 Interface Group Configuration .............................................................................................172 12.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria .................................................................................................174 Chapter 13 USB Service ......................................................................................................................................177 13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................177 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................177 13.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................177 13.2 The File Sharing Screen ...............................................................................................................178 13.2.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................179 13.3 The Media Server Screen .............................................................................................................180 13.4 The Printer Server Screen ............................................................................................................181 13.4.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................181 Chapter 14 Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................183 14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................183 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................183 14.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................184 14.2 The Firewall Screen ......................................................................................................................185 14.3 The Service Screen ......................................................................................................................185 14.3.1 Add/Edit a Service ..............................................................................................................187 14.4 The Access Control Screen ..........................................................................................................188 14.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule ........................................................................................................189 14.5 The DoS Screen ............................................................................................................................190 Chapter 15 MAC Filter..........................................................................................................................................193 15.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................193 15.2 The MAC Filter Screen ..................................................................................................................193 Chapter 16 Parental Control................................................................................................................................195 16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................195 16.2 The Parental Control Screen .........................................................................................................195 16.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Rule .........................................................................................196 Chapter 17 Scheduler Rule..................................................................................................................................199 17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................199 17.2 The Scheduler Rule Screen ..........................................................................................................199 17.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule ............................................................................................................200 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 9 Table of Contents Chapter 18 Certificates ........................................................................................................................................201 18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................201 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................201 18.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................201 18.3 The Local Certificates Screen .......................................................................................................202 18.3.1 Create Certificate Request .................................................................................................203 18.3.2 Load Signed Certificate ......................................................................................................204 18.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................................205 18.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate .................................................................................................206 18.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate ..............................................................................................207 Chapter 19 VPN ....................................................................................................................................................209 19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................209 19.2 IPSec VPN ....................................................................................................................................209 19.2.1 The General Screen ............................................................................................................209 19.2.2 IPSec VPN: Add ..................................................................................................................210 19.3 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................215 19.3.1 IPSec Architecture ...............................................................................................................215 19.3.2 Encapsulation ......................................................................................................................216 19.3.3 IKE Phases .........................................................................................................................217 19.3.4 Negotiation Mode ................................................................................................................218 19.3.5 IPSec and NAT ....................................................................................................................218 19.3.6 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal .............................................................................................219 19.3.7 Pre-Shared Key ...................................................................................................................219 19.3.8 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups ..........................................................................................220 Chapter 20 Log ....................................................................................................................................................221 20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................221 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................221 20.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................221 20.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................222 20.3 The Security Log Screen ...............................................................................................................223 Chapter 21 Traffic Status ....................................................................................................................................225 21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................225 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................225 21.2 The WAN Status Screen ...............................................................................................................225 21.3 The LAN Status Screen .................................................................................................................227 21.4 The NAT Status Screen .................................................................................................................228 10 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Table of Contents Chapter 22 ARP Table ..........................................................................................................................................229 22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................229 22.1.1 How ARP Works ..................................................................................................................229 22.2 ARP Table Screen .........................................................................................................................229 Chapter 23 Routing Table ....................................................................................................................................231 23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................231 23.2 The Routing Table Screen .............................................................................................................231 Chapter 24 IGMP Status ......................................................................................................................................233 24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................233 24.2 The IGMP Group Status Screen ...................................................................................................233 Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics..................................................................................................................................235 25.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen ...........................................................................................................235 Chapter 26 3G Statistics .....................................................................................................................................239 26.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................239 26.2 The 3G Statistics Screen ...............................................................................................................239 Chapter 27 User Account ....................................................................................................................................241 27.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................241 27.2 The User Account Screen .............................................................................................................241 Chapter 28 Remote Management........................................................................................................................243 28.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................243 28.2 The Remote MGMT Screen ..........................................................................................................243 Chapter 29 TR-069 Client.....................................................................................................................................245 29.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................245 29.2 The TR-069 Client Screen ............................................................................................................245 Chapter 30 TR-064................................................................................................................................................247 30.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................247 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 11 Table of Contents 30.2 The TR-064 Screen .......................................................................................................................247 Chapter 31 Time Settings ....................................................................................................................................249 31.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................249 31.2 The Time Screen ..........................................................................................................................249 Chapter 32 E-mail Notification ............................................................................................................................253 32.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................253 32.2 The Email Notification Screen .......................................................................................................253 32.2.1 Email Notification Edit ........................................................................................................254 Chapter 33 Logs Setting .....................................................................................................................................255 33.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................255 33.2 The Log Settings Screen ...............................................................................................................256 33.2.1 Example E-mail Log ............................................................................................................257 Chapter 34 Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................................................259 34.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................259 34.2 The Firmware Screen ....................................................................................................................259 Chapter 35 Configuration ....................................................................................................................................261 35.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................261 35.2 The Configuration Screen .............................................................................................................261 35.3 The Reboot Screen .......................................................................................................................263 Chapter 36 Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................265 36.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................265 36.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................265 36.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................265 36.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup ...................................................................................................266 36.4 802.1ag .........................................................................................................................................267 36.5 OAM Ping ......................................................................................................................................268 Chapter 37 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................271 37.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................271 37.2 Device Access and Login ..............................................................................................................272 12 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Table of Contents 37.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................274 37.4 Wireless Internet Access ...............................................................................................................275 37.5 USB Device Connection ................................................................................................................276 37.6 UPnP .............................................................................................................................................276 Appendix A Customer Support ........................................................................................................277 Appendix B Legal Information..........................................................................................................283 Index ..................................................................................................................................................289 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 13 Table of Contents 14 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide PART I Users Guide 15 16 CHAPTER 1 Introducing the Device 1.1 Overview The Device is a wireless VDSL router. It has a DSL port for super-fast Internet access over analog

(POTS) telephone lines. The Device supports both Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). It is backward compatible with ADSL, ADSL2 and ADSL2+ in case VDSL is not available. Only use firmware for your Devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Device. The Device has a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive. 1.2 Ways to Manage the Device Use any of the following methods to manage the Device. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Device using a

(supported) web browser. TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device. 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device Do the following things regularly to make the Device more secure and to manage the Device more effectively. Change the password. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the Device to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the Device. You could simply restore your last configuration. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 17 Chapter 1 Introducing the Device 1.4 Applications for the Device Here are some example uses for which the Device is well suited. 1.4.1 Internet Access Your Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have multiple WAN services over one ADSL or VDSL. The Device cannot work in ADSL and VDSL mode at the same time. Note: The ADSL and VDSL lines share the same WAN (layer-2) interfaces that you configure in the Device. Refer to Section 5.2 on page 42 for the Network Setting

> Broadband screen. Computers can connect to the Devices LAN ports (or wirelessly). Figure 1 Devices Internet Access Application WLAN LAN WLAN LAN WAN WAN Bridging IPoE PPPoE ADSL / VDSL Bridging PPPoE IPoE PPPoA IPoA ADSL A A You can also configure IP filtering on the Device for secure Internet access. When the IP filter is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files. 18 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the Device 1.4.2 Devices USB Support The USB port of the Device is used for file-sharing. File Sharing Use the built-in USB 2.0 port to share files on a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive (B). You can connect one USB hard drive to the Device at a time. Use FTP to access the files on the USB device. Figure 2 USB File Sharing Application B Media Server A You can also use the Device as a media server. This lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from a USB device (B) connected to the Devices USB port (without having to copy them to another computer). Figure 3 USB Media Server Application B A VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 19 Chapter 1 Introducing the Device 1.5 LEDs (Lights) The following table describes the behavior of the LEDs. None of the LEDs are on if the Device is not receiving power. Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLOR Green STATUS On Blinking USB DSL Green Orange Green WLAN/WPS Orange 4~1 Green ETHERNET INTERNET Green Red Green POWER Red Off On Blinking On Blinking Off On Blinking Blinking Off On Blinking Off On Blinking Off On On Blinking On Off Blinking DESCRIPTION The Device recognizes a USB connection. The Device is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected to it. The Device does not detect a USB connection. The ADSL line is up. The Device is initializing the ADSL line. The VDSL line is up. The Device is initializing the VDSL line. The DSL line is down. The wireless network is activated. The Device is communicating with other wireless clients. The Device is setting up a WPS connection. The wireless network is not activated. The Device has a successful 100 Mbps Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN). The Device is sending or receiving data to/from the LAN at 100 Mbps. The Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN. The Device has an IP connection but no traffic. Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up. The Device is sending or receiving IP traffic. There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode. The Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE authentication failed. The Device is receiving power and ready for use. The Device is self-testing. The Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction. The Device is not receiving power. Firmware upgrade is in progress. 1.6 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234. 20 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the Device 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts. 1.7 Wireless Access The Device is a wireless Access Point (AP) for wireless clients, such as notebook computers or tablets. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet cables. You can configure your wireless network in either the built-in Web Configurator, or using the WPS button. Figure 4 Wireless Access Example 1.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button If the wireless network is turned off, press the WLAN/WPS button at the back of the Device for one second. Once the WLAN/WPS LED turns green, the wireless network is active. You can also use the WLAN/WPS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between the Device and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time. To activate WPS:

1 Make sure the POWER LED is on and not blinking. 2 3 Press the WLAN/WPS button for five seconds and release it. Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the Device. The WLAN/WPS LED flashes orange while the Device sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device. 4 Once the connection is successfully made, the WLAN/WPS LED shines green. To turn off the wireless network, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the Device for one second. The WLAN/WPS LED turns off when the wireless network is off. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 21 Chapter 1 Introducing the Device 22 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 2 The Web Configurator 2.1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. JavaScript (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 3 Launch your web browser. If the Device does not automatically re-direct you to the login screen, go to http://192.168.1.1. A password screen displays. To access the administrative web configurator and manage the Device, type the default username admin and password 1234 in the password screen and click Login. If advanced account security is enabled (see Section 27.2 on page 241) the number of dots that appears when you type the password changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the password field from knowing the length of your password. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click Login. Figure 5 Password Screen VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 23 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 4 5 6 The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password. It is strongly recommended you change the default password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and click Apply; alternatively click Skip to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now. Figure 6 Change Password Screen The Quick Start Wizard screen appears. You can configure the Devices time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless settings. See Chapter 3 on page 31 for more information. After you finished or closed the Quick Start Wizard screen, the Network Map page appears. Figure 7 Network Map 7 Click Status to display the Status screen, where you can view the Devices interface and system information. 24 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 2.2 Web Configurator Layout A Figure 8 Screen Layout B C As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:

A - title bar B - main window C - navigation panel 2.2.1 Title Bar The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 25 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator The icons provide the following functions. Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar ICON Quick Start DESCRIPTION Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the Devices time zone Internet access, and wireless settings. Click this icon to log out of the web configurator. Logout 2.2.2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this document. After you click Status on the Connection Status page, the Status screen is displayed. See Chapter 4 on page 36 for more information about the Status screen. 26 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 2 The Web Configurator If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen, a visual graphic appears, showing the connection status of the Devices ports. The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are gray. Figure 9 Virtual Device 2.2.3 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Device features. The following tables describe each menu item. Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Connection Status TAB Network Setting FUNCTION This screen shows the network status of the Device and computers/

devices connected to it. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 27 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 8021x Wireless Broadband 3G Backup Advanced TAB Broadband Ethernet WAN General Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) LINK FUNCTION Use this screen to view and configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, and other advanced properties. You can also add new WAN connections. Use this screen to configure 3G WAN connection. Use this screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex J, and DSL PhyR functions. Use this screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1x settings on the Device. Use this screen to configure a LAN port as an ethernet WAN port Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication/security settings. Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the Device. Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the Device. Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) settings. Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM). Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System (WDS) links to other access points. Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Use this screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results. Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced properties. Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses. Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT-T on or off. Use this screen to configure IP alias and public static IP. More AP MAC Authentication WPS Others Channel Status Home Networking Static DHCP WMM WDS LAN Setup UPnP Additional Subnet STB Vendor ID Routing LAN VLAN Static Route Policy Forwarding RIP QoS General Queue Setup Class Setup Policer Setup Monitor Use this screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP addresses. Use this screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports. Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the Device. Use this screen to configure policy routing on the Device. Use this screen to configure Routing Information Protocol to exchange routing information with other routers. Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also configure the QoS rules and actions. Use this screen to configure QoS queues. Use this screen to define a classifier. Use these screens to configure QoS policers. Use this screen to view QoS packets statistics. 28 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 2 The Web Configurator NAT TAB Port Forwarding Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) LINK FUNCTION Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world. Use this screen to configure servers behind the Device. Use this screen to change your Devices port triggering settings. Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen. Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG. Applications Port Triggering DMZ ALG Address Mapping Use this screen to change your Devices address mapping settings. DNS Entry Dynamic DNS Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes. Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address. Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group. DNS Interface Group USB Device Security Settings Firewall MAC Filter Parental Control Scheduler Rule Certificates File Sharing Media Server Printer Server Use this screen to enable file sharing via the Device. Use this screen to use the Device as a media server. Use this screen to enable the print server on the Device and get the model name of the associated printer. General Service Access Control DoS Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall. Use this screen to add Internet services and configure firewall rules. Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services. Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain MAC addresses to the Device. Use this screen to block web sites with the specific URL. Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured restriction (such as parental control) is enforced. Local Certificates Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage certificates and certification requests. Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs. Use this screen to add or edit VPN policies. Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the Device. You can export or e-mail the logs. Use this screen to view the login record of the Device. You can export or e-mail the logs. Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the Device. Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the Device. Use this screen to view NAT statistics for connected hosts. Use this screen to view the ARP table. It displays the IP and MAC address of each DHCP connection. Trusted CA IPSec VPN System Monitor Log System Log Security Log Traffic Status WAN LAN NAT ARP Table VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 29 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) LINK FUNCTION Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP settings on the Device. TAB IGMP Group Status xDSL Statistics 3G Monitor Maintenance User Account Remote MGMT TR-069 Client TR-064 Client Time Email Notification Log Setting Firmware Upgrade Configuration Reboot Diagnostic Ping &

Traceroute &

Nslookup 802.1ag OAM Ping Use this screen to view the Devices xDSL traffic statistics. Use this screen to look at 3G Internet connection status. Use this screen to change user password on the Device. Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services. Use this screen to configure the Device to be managed by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). Use this screen to enable management via TR-064 on the LAN. Use this screen to change your Devices time and date. Use this screen to configure up to two mail servers and sender addresses on the Device. Use this screen to change your Devices log settings. Use this screen to upload firmware to your device. Use this screen to backup and restore your devices configuration

(settings) or reset the factory default settings. Use this screen to reboot the Device without turning the power off. Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. You can use Ping, TraceRoute, or Nslookup to help you identify problems. Use this screen to configure CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) MD (maintenance domain) and MA (maintenance association), perform connectivity tests and view test reports. Use this screen to view information to help you identify problems with the DSL connection. 30 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 3 Quick Start 3.1 Overview Use the Quick Start screens to configure the Devices time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless settings. Note: See the technical reference chapters (starting on page 33) for background information on the features in this chapter. 3.2 Quick Start Setup 1 The Quick Start Wizard appears automatically after login. Or you can click the Click Start icon in the top right corner of the web configurator to open the quick start screens. Select the time zone of the Devices location and click Next. Figure 10 Time Zone VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 31 Chapter 3 Quick Start 2 Enter your Internet connection information in this screen. The screen and fields to enter may vary depending on your current connection type. Click Next. Click Next. Figure 11 Internet Connection 3 Turn the wireless LAN on or off. If you keep it on, record the security settings so you can configure your wireless clients to connect to the Device. Click Save. Figure 12 Internet Connection 4 Your Device saves your settings and attempts to connect to the Internet. 32 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide PART II Technical Reference 33 34 CHAPTER 4 Network Map and Status Screens 4.1 Overview After you log into the Web Configurator, the Network Map screen appears. This shows the network connection status of the Device and clients connected to it. You can use the Status screen to look at the current status of the Device, system resources, and interfaces (LAN, WAN, and WLAN). 4.2 The Network Map Screen Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning message appears if there is a connection problem. If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the Viewing Mode selection box. You can configure how often you want the Device to update this screen in Refresh Interval. Figure 13 Network Map: Icon Mode Figure 14 Network Map: List Mode VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 35 Chapter 4 Network Map and Status Screens In Icon Mode, if you want to view information about a client, click the clients name and Info. Click the IP address if you want to change it. If you want to change the name or icon of the client, click Change icon/name. In List Mode, you can also view the clients information. 4.3 The Status Screen Use this screen to view the status of the Device. Click Status to open this screen. Figure 15 Status Screen 36 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 4 Network Map and Status Screens Each field is described in the following table. Table 4 Status Screen LABEL Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen. Device Information DESCRIPTION Host Name Model Number Firmware Version This field displays the Device system name. It is used for identification. This shows the model number of your Device. This is the current version of the firmware inside the Device. WAN Information (These fields display when you have a WAN connection.) WAN Type MAC Address IP Address This field displays the current WAN connection type. This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device. This field displays the current IP address of the Device in the WAN. Click Release to release your IP address to 0.0.0.0. If you want to renew your IP address, click Renew. IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN. Encapsulation LAN Information This field displays the current encapsulation method. IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP MAC Address This is the current IP address of the Device in the LAN. This is the current subnet mask in the LAN. This field displays what DHCP services the Device is providing to the LAN. Choices are:

Server - The Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN. Relay - The Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. None - The Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN. This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device. WLAN Information MAC Address Status SSID Channel Security 802.11 Mode WPS Security This shows the wireless adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device. This displays whether WLAN is activated. This is the descriptive name used to identify the Device in a wireless LAN. This is the channel number used by the Device now. This displays the type of security mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN. This displays the type of 802.11 mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN. This displays whether WPS is activated. Firewall This displays the firewalls current security level. System Status System Up Time Current Date/Time This field displays how long the Device has been running since it last started up. The Device starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Reboot), or when you reset it. This field displays the current date and time in the Device. You can change this in Maintenance> Time Setting. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 37 Chapter 4 Network Map and Status Screens Table 4 Status Screen (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage This field displays what percentage of the Devices processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the Device is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using QoS; see Chapter 9 on page 131). This field displays what percentage of the Devices memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the Device is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section 35.2 on page 261, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds. 38 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 5 Broadband 5.1 Overview This chapter discusses the Devices Broadband screens. Use these screens to configure your Device for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks, such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 16 LAN and WAN WAN 3G (third generation) standards for the sending and receiving of voice, video, and data in a mobile environment. You can attach a 3G wireless adapter to the USB port and set the Device to use this 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails. Figure 17 3G WAN Connection 5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Broadband screen to view, remove or add a WAN interface. You can also configure the WAN settings on the Device for Internet access (Section 5.2 on page 42). Use the 3G Backup screen to configure 3G WAN connection (Section 5.3 on page 51). VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 39 Chapter 5 Broadband Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex J, and DSL PhyR functions (Section 5.4 on page 55). Use the 8021x screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1X settings on the Device (Section 5.5 on page 56). MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGS Table 5 WAN Setup Overview LAYER-2 INTERFACE CONNECTION DSL LINK TYPE N/A ADSL/VDSL over PTM INTERNET CONNECTION Routing PPPoE IPoE ADSL over ATM EoA Bridge Routing N/A PPPoE/PPP0A EtherWAN N/A IPoE/IPoA N/A PPPoE IPoE N/A Bridge Routing Bridge PPP information, IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU VLAN and QoS ATM PVC configuration, PPP information, IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU ATM PVC configuration, IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU ATM PVC configuration, and QoS PPP user name and password, WAN IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU WAN IPv4/IPv6 IP address, NAT, DNS server and routing feature VLAN and QoS 5.1.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet), they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the Device, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the Device tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es). 40 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a WAN networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of Service) can be guaranteed. ATM uses a connection-oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit

(VC) between Finding Out More PTM Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) is packet-oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard. In PTM, packets are encapsulated directly in the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) frames. It is designed to provide a low-overhead, transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links, as an alternative to ATM. 3G 3G (Third Generation) is a digital, packet-switched wireless technology. Bandwidth usage is optimized as multiple users share the same channel and bandwidth is only allocated to users when they send data. It allows fast transfer of voice and non-voice data and provides broadband Internet access to mobile devices. IPv6 Introduction IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. The Device can use IPv4/IPv6 dual stack to connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks, and supports IPv6 rapid deployment (6RD). IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 41 Chapter 5 Broadband compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. IPv6 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each blocks 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000. 5.1.3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP. 5.2 The Broadband Screen Use this screen to change your Devices Internet access settings. Click Network Setting >

Broadband from the menu. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services

(connections) on the Device. Figure 18 Network Setting > Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this button to create a new connection. Table 6 Network Setting > Broadband LABEL Add new WAN Interface

Name Type Mode Encapsulation 802.1p This is the index number of the entry. This is the service name of the connection. This shows whether it is an ATM, PTM, or Ethernet connection. This shows whether the connection is in routing or bridge mode. This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection. This indicates the 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no priority level assigned. This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned. 802.1q 42 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 6 Network Setting > Broadband (continued) LABEL IGMP Proxy NAT Default Gateway IPv6 DESCRIPTION This shows whether the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection. This shows whether the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. This shows whether IPv6 is activated or not for this connection. IPv6 is not available when the connection uses the bridging service. This shows whether Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is activated or not for this connection. MLD is not available when the connection uses the bridging service. Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection. MLD Proxy Modify/Delete Click the Delete icon to remove the WAN connection. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 43 Chapter 5 Broadband 5.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection Click Add new WAN Interface in the Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN interface to configure a WAN connection. The screen varies depending on the interface type, mode, encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode you select. 5.2.1.1 Routing Mode Use Routing mode if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. The following example screen displays when you select the ADSL over ATM connection type, Routing mode, and PPPoE encapsulation. The screen varies when you select other interface type, encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode. Figure 19 Routing Mode The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 7 Routing Mode LABEL General Active Name Type Mode Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings. Specify a descriptive name for this connection. Select whether it is an ADSL/VDSL over PTM, ADSL over ATM connection or Ethernet. Select Routing if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. 44 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Routing Mode (continued) LABEL Encapsulation DESCRIPTION Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. This option is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field. The choices depend on the connection type you selected. If your connection type is ADSL/

VDSL over PTM, the choices are PPPoE and IPoE. If your connection type is ADSL over ATM, the choices are PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE and IPoA. IPv6/IPv4 Mode Select IPv4 Only if you want the Device to run IPv4 only. Select IPv6/IPv4 DualStack to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time. Select IPv6 Only if you want the Device to run IPv6 only. ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM.) VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM VCI traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. This field is not editable. The selection depends on the setting in the Encapsulation field. DSL Link Type EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods. PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC. Encapsulation Mode IPoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC. Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices are:

LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field. VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit

(VC). To transport multiple protocols, the Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload. LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This is available only when you select PPPoA in the Encapsulation field. LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is available only when you select IPoA in the Encapsulation field. Service Category Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate

(PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR. The Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. Peak Cell Rate Sustainable Cell Rate VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 45 Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Routing Mode (continued) LABEL Maximum Burst Size DESCRIPTION Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. This is available only when you select PPPoE or PPPoA in the Mode field. PPP Information PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given. Enter the password associated with the user name above. Select this option if you do not want the connection to time out. PPP Password PPP Auto Connect IDLE Timeout PPPoE Service Name PPPoE Passthrough IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address NAT Enable IGMP Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway DNS Server This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. This field is not configurable if you select PPP Auto Connect. Enter the name of your PPPoE service here. This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation. In addition to the Devices built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Device. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address. PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate. Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP. This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/

IPv4 Mode field. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed;

the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you have a dynamic IP address. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP. Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP. Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP. IPv4 Mode field. Select this option to activate NAT on this connection. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Select this option to have the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows the Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/

IPv4 Mode field. Routing Feature This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/

46 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Routing Mode (continued) LABEL DNS DESCRIPTION Select Dynamic if you want the Device use the DNS server addresses assigned by your ISP. Select Static if you want the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 WAN MAC Address Factory Default Clone the computers MAC address Set WAN MAC Address Select Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC address. Select this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication. Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. IPv6 Address IPv6 Address This is available only when you select IPv6/IPv4 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the IPv6/

IPv4 Mode field. Select Automatic if you want to have the Device use the IPv6 prefix from the connected routers Router Advertisement (RA) to generate an IPv6 address. Select the Get IPv6 Address From DHCPv6 Server check box if you want to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address automatically generated by the Device using the IPv6 prefix from an RA. This option is available only when you choose to get your IPv6 address automatically. Select Static if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP. Select None to not assign any IPv6 address to this WAN connection. Enter the IPv6 address assigned by your ISP. Enter the address prefix length to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address compose the network address. Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your Device's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. You can enable IPv6 routing features in the following section. Select this check box to have the Device act as an MLD proxy on this connection. This allows the Device to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. Configure the IPv6 DNS server in the following section. Select Dynamic to have the Device get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Select Static to have the Device use the IPv6 DNS server addresses you configure manually. Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP. WAN IPv6 Address Prefix Length Next Hop IPv6 Routing Feature MLD Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway IPv6 DNS Server IPv6 DNS IPv6 DNS Server 1 IPv6 DNS Server 2 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 47 Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Routing Mode (continued) LABEL VLAN Active DESCRIPTION These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL/VDSL over PTM. Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection. Enter the MTU (Maximum Transfer Unit) size for this traffic. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 802.1p 802.1q QoS Rate Limit MTU MTU Size Apply Cancel 5.2.1.2 Bridge Mode Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting > Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure. Select Bridge as the encapsulation mode. The screen varies depending on the interface type you select. If you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM as the interface type, the following screen appears. Figure 20 Bridge Mode (ADSL/VDSL over PTM) 48 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Chapter 5 Broadband DESCRIPTION Table 8 Bridge Mode (ADSL/VDSL over PTM) LABEL General Active Name Type Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings. Enter a service name of the connection. Select ADSL/VDSL over PTM as the interface that you want to configure. The Device uses the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s). This section is available only when you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM in the Type field. Select this to add the VLAN Tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. Type the VLAN ID number (from 0 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Mode VLAN Active 802.1p 802.1q QoS Rate Limit Apply Cancel If you select ADSL over ATM as the interface type, the following screen appears. Figure 21 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM) VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 49 Chapter 5 Broadband The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 9 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM) LABEL General Active Name Type Mode Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings. Enter a service name of the connection. Select ADSL over ATM as the interface for which you want to configure here. The Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s). ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM.) The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. VPI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM VCI traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. This field is not editable. The selection depends on the setting in the Encapsulation field. DSL Link Type EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods. PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC. Encapsulation Mode IPoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC. Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices are:

LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field. VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit

(VC). To transport multiple protocols, the Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload. LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This is available only when you select PPPoA in the Encapsulation field. LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is available only when you select IPoA in the Encapsulation field. Service Category Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate

(PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR. Peak Cell Rate 50 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 9 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM) (continued) LABEL Sustainable Cell Rate DESCRIPTION The Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. Maximum Burst Size This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. QoS Rate Limit Apply Cancel Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 5.3 The 3G Backup Screen Use this screen to configure your 3G settings. Click Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 51 Chapter 5 Broadband Note: The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use, the signal strength to the service providers base station, and so on. Figure 22 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup LABEL General 3G Backup DESCRIPTION Select Enable to have the Device use the 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails. Select Enable if you want the Device to ping check the connection status of your WAN. You can configure the frequency of the ping check and number of consecutive failures before triggering 3G backup. Enter the frequency of the ping check in this field. Enter how many consecutive failures are required before 3G backup is triggered. Select this to have the Device ping the WAN interfaces default gateway IP address. Ping Check Check Cycle Consecutive Fail Ping Default Gateway Ping the Host Select this to have the Device ping the particular host name or IP address you typed in this field. 3G Connection Settings Card description This field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in the Device. Otherwise, it displays N/A. 52 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued) LABEL Username DESCRIPTION Type the user name (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) given to you by your service provider. Type the password (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) associated with the user name above. A PIN (Personal Identification Number) code is a key to a 3G card. Without the PIN code, you cannot use the 3G card. If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication, enter the 4-digit PIN code (0000 for example) provided by your ISP. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly, the 3G card may be blocked by your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet. If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication, leave this field blank. Enter the phone number (dial string) used to dial up a connection to your service providers base station. Your ISP should provide the phone number. For example, *99# is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan. Enter the APN (Access Point Name) provided by your service provider. Connections with different APNs may provide different services (such as Internet access or MMS (Multi-Media Messaging Service)) and charge method. Password PIN Dial string APN Connection You can enter up to 32 ASCII printable characters. Spaces are allowed. Select Nailed UP if you do not want the connection to time out. Max Idle Timeout Obtain an IP Address Automatically Use the following static IP address IP Address Obtain DNS info dynamically Use the following static DNS IP address Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server Advanced Budget Setup Enable Budget Control Time Budget Select on Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field. This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the Device automatically disconnects from the ISP. Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use the following static IP address. Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Click this to show the advanced 3G backup settings. Select Enable to set a monthly limit for the user account of the installed 3G card. You can set a limit on the total traffic and/or call time. The Device takes the actions you specified when a limit is exceeded during the month. Select this and specify the amount of time (in hours) that the 3G connection can be used within one month. If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 53 Chapter 5 Broadband Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued) LABEL Data Budget

(Mbytes) DESCRIPTION Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in Mega bytes) can be transmitted via the 3G connection within one month. Select Download/Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions. Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the Device). Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the Device to the ISP). If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics. Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in k Packets) can be transmitted via the 3G connection within one month. Data Budget

(kPackets) Select Download/Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions. Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the Device). Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the Device to the ISP). If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics. Select the date on which the Device resets the budget every month. Select last if you want the Device to reset the budget on the last day of the month. Select specific and enter the number of the date you want the Device to reset the budget Click this button to reset the time and data budgets immediately. The count starts over with the 3G connections full configured monthly time and data budgets. This does not affect the normal monthly budget restart; so if you configured the time and data budget counters to reset on the second day of the month and you use this button on the first, the time and data budget counters will still reset on the second. Specify the actions the Device takes before the time or data limit exceeds. Select Enable and enter a number from 1 to 99 in the percentage fields. If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics. Specify the actions the Device takes when the time or data limit is exceeded. Select Keep to maintain an existing 3G connection or Drop to disconnect it. Select this to enable the e-mail notification function. The Device will e-mail you a notification when there over budget occurs. Select a mail server for the e-mail address specified below. If you do not select a mail server, e-mail notifications cannot be sent via e-mail. You must have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance > Email Notification screen. Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e-mail notifications that the Device sends. Notifications are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, notifications cannot be sent via e-mail. Enter the interval of how many minutes you want the Device to e-mail you. Select this to activate the logging function at the interval you set in this field. Click this to hide the advanced settings of 3G backup. Reset all budget counters on Reset time and data budget counters Actions before over budget Enable % of time budget/

data budget

(Mbytes)/data budget

(kPackets) Actions when over budget Current 3G connection Enable Email Notification Mail Server Over Budget Email Title Send Notification to Email Interval Enable Log Basic 54 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued) LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. 5.4 The Advanced Screen Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M, and DSL PhyR functions. The Device supports the PhyR retransmission scheme. PhyR is a retransmission scheme designed to provide protection against noise on the DSL line. It improves voice, video and data transmission resilience by utilizing a retransmission buffer. Click Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced to display the following screen. Figure 23 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 11 Network Setting > Network Setting > Broadband LABEL PTM over ADSL Select Enable to use PTM over ADSL. Since PTM has less overhead than ATM, some ISPs DESCRIPTION Annex M PhyR US PhyR DS Apply Cancel use PTM over ADSL for better performance. You can enable Annex M for the Device to use double upstream mode to increase the maximum upstream transfer rate. Enable or disable PhyR US (upstream) for upstream transmission to the WAN. PhyR US should be enabled if data being transmitted upstream is sensitive to noise. However, enabling PhyR US can decrease the US line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it enabled. Enable or disable PhyR DS (downstream) for downstream transmission from the WAN. PhyR DS should be enabled if data being transmitted downstream is sensitive to noise. However, enabling PhyR DS can decrease the DS line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it enabled. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 55 Chapter 5 Broadband 5.5 The 8021x Screen You can view and configure the 802.1X authentication settings in the 8021x screen. Click Network Setting > Broadband > 8021x to display the following screen. Figure 24 Network Setting > Broadband > 8021x The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 12 Network Setting > Network Setting > 8021x LABEL

Status DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the authentication is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this authentication is active. A gray bulb signifies that this authentication is not active. This is the interface that uses the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no interface assigned. This shows the EAP identity of the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no EAP identity assigned. This shows the EAP method used in the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no EAP method assigned. This shows whether bidirectional authentication is allowed. This shows the certificate used for this authentication. This displays N/A when there is no certificate assigned. This shows the Trusted CA used for this authentication. This displays N/A when there is no Trusted CA assigned. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. Interface EAP Identity EAP method Bidirectional Authentication Certificate Trusted CA Apply Cancel 56 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 5.5.1 Edit 802.1X Settings Use this screen to edit 802.1X authentication settings. Click the Edit icon next to the rule you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 25 802.1x: Add/Edit Chapter 5 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 13 802.1x: Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION This field allows you to activate/deactivate the authentication. Select this to enable the authentication. Clear this to disable this authentication without having to delete the entry. This field displays where there is an interface available to select for the 802.1X authentication settings. Select the interface to which to apply the 802.1X authentication settings. Enter the EAP identity of the authentication. This is the EAP method used for this authentication. Select this to allow bidirectional authentication. Select the certificate you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the certificate in the Security > Certificates > Local Certificates screen. Select the Trusted CA you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the certificate in the Security > Certificates > Trusted CA screen. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Interface EAP Identity EAP method Enable Bidirectional Authentication Certificate Trusted CA Apply Cancel 5.6 The Ethernet WAN Screen If you are using an ethernet WAN connection, you can configure a LAN port as an ethernet WAN port. Click Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN to open this screen. Note: LAN port 4 can operate as an Ethernet WAN port. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 57 Chapter 5 Broadband Figure 26 Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 14 Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN LABEL State Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Select Enable to use the Ethernet LAN port as a WAN port on the Device. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 5.7 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described in this chapter. Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The Device can work in bridge mode or routing mode. When the Device is in routing mode, it supports the following methods. IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet (IPoE) is an alternative to PPPoE. IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network, without using PPP encapsulation. They are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells. PPP over ATM (PPPoA) PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The Device encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Providers (ISP) DSLAM (digital access multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP. 58 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the Device does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5

(AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit

(LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information. Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP. VC-based Multiplexing In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical. LLC-based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs. Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 59 Chapter 5 Broadband Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed. Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again. If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate. The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS. Figure 27 Example of Traffic Shaping ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0 Specification. Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice. Variable Bit Rate (VBR) The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time

(VBR-nRT) connections. The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is 60 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics. The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers. Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer. IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway. Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router. In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building. VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain. Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame). The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 61 Chapter 5 Broadband number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094. TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast

(1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. At start up, the Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the Device periodically updates this information. DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The Device can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. 1 2 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields. If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the Devices WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP. IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

62 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 63 Chapter 5 Broadband 64 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 6 Wireless 6.1 Overview This chapter describes the Devices Network Setting > Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your Devices wireless connection. 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter This section describes the Devices Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your Devices wireless connection. Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode (Section 6.2 on page 66). Use the More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your Device (Section 6.3 on page 75). Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the Device (Section 6.4 on page 78). Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS, view or generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) (Section 6.5 on page 79). Use the WMM screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications (Section 6.6 on page 81). Use the WDS screen to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the Device acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points (Section 6.7 on page 82). Use the Others screen to configure wireless advanced features, such as the RTS/CTS Threshold

(Section 6.8 on page 84). Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results

(Section 6.9 on page 86). VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 65 Chapter 6 Wireless 6.1.2 What You Need to Know Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption. Finding Out More See Section 6.10 on page 86 for advanced technical information on wireless networks. 6.2 The General Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. Note: If you are configuring the Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the Devices SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the Devices new settings. 66 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Figure 28 Network Setting > Wireless > General Chapter 6 Wireless VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 67 Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 15 Network Setting > Wireless > General LABEL Wireless Network Setup Wireless Band Channel more.../less Bandwidth Control Sideband Passphrase Type You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field. This shows the wireless band which this radio profile is using. 2.4GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients. Set the channel depending on your particular region. Select a channel or use Auto to have the Device automatically determine a channel to use. If you are having problems with wireless interference, changing the channel may help. Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible. The channel number which the Device is currently using then displays next to this field. Click more... to show more information. Click less to hide them. Select whether the Device uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or 40MHz, or use Auto to have the Device automatically select one. A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps. 40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal. Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding. This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth field to 40MHz. Set whether the control channel (set in the Channel field) should be in the Lower or Upper range of channel bands. If you set security for the wireless LAN and have the Device generate a password, the setting in this field determines how the Device generates the password. Select None to set the Devices password generation to not be based on a passphrase. Select Fixed to use a 16 character passphrase for generating a password. Passphrase Key Select Variable to use a 16 to 63 character passphrase for generating a password. For a fixed type passphrase enter 16 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive. For a variable type passphrase enter 16 to 63 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive. Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name

(SSID) Max clients Hide SSID The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Client Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other MBSSID/LAN Isolation through the Device. Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the Device. Select both Client Isolation and MBSSID/LAN Isolation to allow this SSIDs wireless clients to only connect to the Internet through the Device. 68 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless DESCRIPTION Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic. Table 15 Network Setting > Wireless > General (continued) LABEL Enhanced Multicast Forwarding Maximum Upstream Bandwidth Maximum Downstream Bandwidth BSSID Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in kilobits per second (Kbps). Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in kilobits per second (Kbps). This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Device when wireless LAN is enabled. Security Level Security Mode Select Basic (WEP, 802.1X) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the Device. When you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. Apply Cancel See the following sections for more details about this field. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 6.2.1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication. Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your Device, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 29 Wireless > General: No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 16 Wireless > General: No Security LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Choose No Security to allow all wireless connections without data encryption or authentication. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 69 Chapter 6 Wireless 6.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points

(AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key. Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available. Your Device allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time. In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen, then select Basic as the security level. Figure 30 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 17 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) LABEL Security Level Generate password automatically DESCRIPTION Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption. Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option. 70 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 17 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) (continued) LABEL Password 1~4 DESCRIPTION The password (WEP keys) are used to encrypt data. Both the Device and the wireless stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission. If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters

("0-9", "A-F"). If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters

("0-9", "A-F"). You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at any one time. Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them. more.../less WEP Encryption Select 64-bits or 128-bits. This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use. 6.2.3 Basic (802.1X) Use this screen to configure 802.1X encryption and authentication. Configure your RADIUS server information and WEP encryption settings. Use this security method if your wireless usernames and passwords are configured on a RADIUS server. In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen, then select Basic as the security level and 802.1X as the Security Mode. Figure 31 Wireless > General: Basic (802.1X) VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 71 Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 18 Wireless > General: Basic (802.1X) LABEL Security Level Generate password automatically Password 1~4 DESCRIPTION Select Basic and 802.1X to enable 802.1X data encryption. Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option. The password (WEP key) is used to encrypt data. Both the Device and the wireless stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission. If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters

("0-9", "A-F"). If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters

("0-9", "A-F"). You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at any one time. Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them. more.../less WEP Encryption Select 64-bits or 128-bits. IP Address Port Number Shared Secret This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use. Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation. The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so. Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the Device. This key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Device. 72 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6.2.4 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the Device and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be. Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 32 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 19 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK LABEL Security Level Security Mode Generate password automatically Password DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box. Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. more.../less WPA-PSK Compatible If you did not select Generate password automatically, you can manually type a pre-

shared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters. Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them. This field appears when you choose WPA-PSK2 as the Security Mode. Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to connect to your Device. The Device supports WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 73 Chapter 6 Wireless Table 19 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK (continued) LABEL Encryption DESCRIPTION Select the encryption type (TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption. Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP. Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES. Group Key Update Timer Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES. The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. 6.2.5 WPA(2) Authentication The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks. It requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security protocol. Use this security option for maximum protection of your network. However, it is the least backwards compatible with older devices. The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2. It requires the presence of a RADIUS server on your network in order to validate user credentials. This encryption standard is slightly older than WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices. Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list. Figure 33 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) 74 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) LABEL Security Level Security Mode Authentication Server DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption. Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box. IP Address Port Number Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port number is 1812. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the Device. The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your Device. The key is not sent over the network. Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them. This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the Device to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously. Select the encryption type (TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption. Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP. Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES. Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES. This field is available only when you select WPA2. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Select Enabled to turn on preauthentication in WAP2. Otherwise, select Disabled. Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. Shared Secret more.../less WPA Compatible Encryption WPA2 Pre-

Authentication Network Re-

auth Interval Group Key Update Timer 6.3 The More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the Device. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 75 Chapter 6 Wireless Click Network Setting > Wireless > More AP. The following screen displays. Figure 34 Network Setting > Wireless > More AP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 21 Network Setting > Wireless > More AP LABEL

Status DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry. This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active. A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active. An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the Devices BSSs. The SSID

(Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated. This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility. This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile. This displays if the guest WLAN function has been enabled for this WLAN. If Home Guest displays, clients can connect to each other directly. If External Guest displays, clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly. SSID Security Guest WLAN Modify N/A displays if guest WLAN is disabled. Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile. 76 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 6.3.1 Edit More AP Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen. The following screen displays. Figure 35 More AP: Edit Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 22 More AP: Edit LABEL Wireless Network Setup Wireless Passphrase Type Wireless Network Settings You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field. Passphrase type cannot be changed. The default is None. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 77 Chapter 6 Wireless Table 22 More AP: Edit (continued) LABEL Wireless Network Name

(SSID) Max clients Hide SSID Enhanced Multicast Forwarding Guest WLAN Access Scenario Maximum Upstream Bandwidth Maximum Downstream Bandwidth Security Level Security Mode DESCRIPTION The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic. Select this to create Guest WLANs for home and external clients. Select the WLAN type in the Access Scenario field. If you select Home Guest, clients can connect to each other directly. If you select External Guest, clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly. Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in kilobits per second (Kbps). Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in kilobits per second (Kbps). Select Basic (WEP, 802.1X) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the Device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. Apply Cancel See Section 6.2.1 on page 69 for more details about this field. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 6.4 MAC Authentication This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices

(Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen. 78 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Use this screen to view your Devices MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication. The screen appears as shown. Figure 36 Wireless > MAC Authentication Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 23 Wireless > MAC Authentication LABEL SSID MAC Restrict Mode DESCRIPTION Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings. Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table. Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering. Select Deny to block access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the Device. Select Allow to permit access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Device. Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. This is the index number of the entry. This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the Device. Click the Delete icon to delete the entry. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Add new MAC address

MAC Address Delete Apply Cancel 6.5 The WPS Screen Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your Device. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both devices must support WPS. See Section 6.10.9.3 on page 95 for more information about WPS. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 79 Chapter 6 Wireless Note: The Device applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile (see Section 6.2 on page 66). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the security mode of SSID1 to WPA2-PSK or No Security. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays. Select Enable and click Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen. Figure 37 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS LABEL WPS WPS 2.0 Method 1 DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate WPS on the Device. Select Enable to have the device use WPS 2.0 or Disable to have it use WPS 1.0. Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration (PBC). Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the Connect button on this screen. Connect Note: You must press the other wireless devices WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button. Method 2 Register Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the Device. Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network. You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the devices settings. Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the Device. 80 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS (continued) LABEL Method 3 DESCRIPTION Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the Device into the client. The default WPS status is configured. Release Configuration Generate New PIN Number Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the Device. The PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the Device is shown here. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS. The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method. Apply Cancel Click the Generate New PIN Number button to have the Device create a new PIN. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 6.6 The WMM Screen Use this screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for multimedia applications. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WMM. The following screen displays. Figure 38 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 25 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM LABEL WMM DESCRIPTION Select On to have the Device automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly. Select this option to extend the battery life of your mobile devices (especially useful for small devices that are running multimedia applications). The Device goes to sleep mode to save power when it is not transmitting data. The AP buffers the packets sent to the Device until the Device "wakes up". The Device wakes up periodically to check for incoming data. WMM Automatic Power Save Delivery Note: Note: This works only if the wireless device to which the Device is connected also supports this feature. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 81 Chapter 6 Wireless 6.7 The WDS Screen An AP using the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) can function as a wireless network bridge allowing you to wirelessly connect two wired network segments. The WDS screen allows you to configure the Device to connect to two or more APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled. Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the Device and other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made. Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the Device and any wireless clients. Note: At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only. Not all models support WDS links. Check your other APs documentation. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WDS. The following screen displays. Figure 39 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 26 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS LABEL Wireless Bridge Setup AP Mode DESCRIPTION Select the operating mode for your Device. Access Point - The Device functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously. Wireless Bridge - The Device acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes wireless links with other APs. In this mode, clients cannot connect to the Device wirelessly. Bridge Restrict This field is available only when you set operating mode to Access Point. Select Enabled to turn on WDS and enter the peer devices MAC address manually in the table below. Select Disable to turn off WDS. 82 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 26 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS (continued) LABEL Remote Bridge MAC Address

MAC Address This is the index number of the entry. This shows the MAC address of the peer device. DESCRIPTION You can enter the MAC address of the peer device by clicking the Edit icon under Modify. Modify/Delete You can connect to up to 4 peer devices. Click the Edit icon and type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc). Scan Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to remove this entry. Click the Scan icon to search and display the available APs within range. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 6.7.1 WDS Scan You can click the Scan icon in Wireless > WDS to have the Device automatically search and display the available APs within range. Select an AP and click Apply to have the Device establish a wireless link with the selected wireless device. Figure 40 WDS: Scan The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 27 WDS: Scan LABEL Wireless Bridge Scan Setup Refresh

SSID BSSID Apply Cancel Click Refresh to update the table. This is the index number of the entry. This shows the SSID of the available wireless device within range. This shows the MAC address of the available wireless device within range. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 83 Chapter 6 Wireless 6.8 The Others Screen Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click Network Setting > Wireless >

Others. The screen appears as shown. See Section 6.10.2 on page 88 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen. Figure 41 Network Setting > Wireless > Others The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 28 Network Setting > Wireless > Others LABEL RTS/CTS Threshold DESCRIPTION Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS

(Clear To Send) handshake. Fragmentation Threshold Auto Channel Timer Output Power Enter a value between 0 and 2347. This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2346. If you set the channel to Auto in the Network Setting > Wireless > General screen, specify the interval in minutes for how often the Device scans for the best channel. Enter 0 to disable the periodical scan. Set the output power of the Device. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% or 100%. Beacon Interval When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval. This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again. DTIM Interval The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. This value can be set from 50ms to 1000ms. A high value helps save current consumption of the access point. Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Power Saving mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1 to 255. 84 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Table 28 Network Setting > Wireless > Others (continued) LABEL 802.11 Mode DESCRIPTION Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. Chapter 6 Wireless Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. Select 802.11n Only to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. Select 802.11b/g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced. Select 802.11b/g/n Mixed to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced. Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks (networks with both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic). Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS handshake. This helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance. Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced in a mixed-mode network. This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b Only. Select a preamble type from the drop-down list box. Choices are Long or Short. See Section 6.10.7 on page 92 for more information. This field is configurable only when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 802.11 Protection Preamble Apply Cancel VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 85 Chapter 6 Wireless 6.9 The Channel Status Screen Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results. Click Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status. The screen appears as shown. Click Scan to scan the wireless LAN channels. You can view the results in the Channel Scan Result section. Figure 42 Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status 6.10 Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. 6.10.1 Wireless Network Overview Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges. A wireless client is a radio connected to a users computer. An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network. A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a networks range. 86 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways. An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points. An ad-hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information. The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 43 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your Device is the AP. Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier. If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 87 Chapter 6 Wireless Radio Channels In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select a channel to use. Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of available channels also varies. 6.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the Devices Web Configurator. Table 29 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes not RTS/CTS Threshold aware of each others presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through. By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the Device. The lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission. If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the Device. A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the Device does, it cannot communicate with the Device. The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy. Preamble Authentication Fragmentation Threshold 6.10.3 Wireless Security Overview By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried on it. These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a key phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key. These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a 88 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attackers software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary. Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, its not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place. A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use 70dodchal71vanpoi as your security key. The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 6.10.3.1 SSID Normally, the Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the Device does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 6.10.3.2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the devices Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. 6.10.3.3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. 1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. 2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 89 Chapter 6 Wireless For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. 6.10.3.4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section 6.10.3.3 on page 89 for information about this.) Table 30 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication Weakest NO AUTHENTICATION No Security Static WEP WPA-PSK RADIUS SERVER WPA Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2 For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the Device and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your Device, you can also select an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA compatible option in the Device. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key. 90 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6.10.4 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance, interference and absorption. Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal. 6.10.5 BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 44 Basic Service set 6.10.6 MBSSID Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The Devices VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 91 Chapter 6 Wireless MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security modes to different SSIDs. Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP. 6.10.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously. You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs

(they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each others communications (but not communicate with each other). MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security. 6.10.7 Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet. Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks. Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications. Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the Device uses long preamble. Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate. 6.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) The Device can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made. At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to your other access points documentation for details. The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a wireless client connecting to access point AP 1. AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but it can 92 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide establish a WDS link with access point AP 2, which has a wired Internet connection. When AP 1 has a WDS link with AP 2, the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2. Chapter 6 Wireless Figure 45 WDS Link Example A WDS AP 1 AP 2 6.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) Your Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 6.10.9.1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. 1 2 3 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the Device, see Section 6.6 on page 81). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesnt matter which). For the Device you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds. 4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name

(SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 93 Chapter 6 Wireless 6.10.9.2 PIN Configuration Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method. When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network. Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router

(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices. Access the WPS section of the APs configuration interface. See the devices Users Guide for how to do this. Look for the clients WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the clients configuration interface (see the devices Users Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the Device, see Section 6.5 on page 79). Enter the clients PIN in the APs configuration interface. If the client devices configuration interface has an area for entering another devices PIN, you can either enter the clients PIN in the AP, or enter the APs PIN in the client - it does not matter which. Start WPS on both devices within two minutes. 7 Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. 8 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 94 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. Figure 46 Example WPS Process: PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR Chapter 6 Wireless WPS This devices WPS PIN: 123456 WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device:

WPS WPS START START WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA(2)-PSK COMMUNICATION 6.10.9.3 How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 95 Chapter 6 Wireless The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. Figure 47 How WPS works ACTIVATE WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES ACTIVATE WPS ENROLLEE WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION REGISTRAR The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is unconfigured. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes configured. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. 6.10.9.4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 96 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. Figure 48 WPS: Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 1 SECURITY INFO REGISTRAR AP1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 49 WPS: Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR AP1 EXISTING CONNECTION O F Y I N R I T U C E S CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 97 Chapter 6 Wireless In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. Figure 50 WPS: Example Network Step 3 CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 EXISTING CONNECTION N T I O C E N N O G C T I N X I S E SECURITY INFO AP1 ENROLLEE AP2 6.10.9.5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK). 98 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access points configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 99 Chapter 6 Wireless 100 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 7 Home Networking 7.1 Overview A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building. Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. LAN DSL 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your Device (Section 7.2 on page 103). Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses (Section 7.3 on page 107). Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the Device (Section 7.4 on page 108). Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP (Section 7.5 on page 109). Use the STB Vendor ID screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP addresses (Section 7.8 on page 119) Use the LAN VLAN screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports (Section 7.9 on page 120). VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 101 Chapter 7 Home Networking 7.1.2 What You Need To Know 7.1.2.1 About LAN IP Address IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet Mask Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. DHCP A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your Device an IP address, subnet mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on. DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a networking device before you can access it. RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) When an IPv6 host sends a Router Solicitation (RS) request to discover the available routers, RADVD with Router Advertisement (RA) messages in response to the request. It specifies the minimum and maximum intervals of RA broadcasts. RA messages containing the address prefix. IPv6 hosts can be generated with the IPv6 prefix an IPv6 address. 7.1.2.2 About UPnP Identifying UPnP Devices UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses 102 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the Chapter 10 on page 149 for more information on NAT. Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. See Section 7.5 on page 109 for examples of installing and using UPnP. Finding Out More See Section 7.10 on page 120 for technical background information on LANs. 7.1.3 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. 7.2 The LAN Setup Screen Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your Device. Click Network Setting > Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen. Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings. 1 2 Enter an IP address into the IP Address field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation. This will become the IP address of your Device. Enter the IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP address you entered. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 103 Chapter 7 Home Networking 3 Click Apply to save your settings. Figure 51 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup LABEL Interface Group Group Name DESCRIPTION Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings. See Chapter 12 on page 171 for how to create a new interface group. LAN IP Setup IP Address Subnet Mask IGMP Snooping Status Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your Device in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so. Select the Enable IGMP Snooping check box to allows the Device to passively learn multicast group. 104 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued) LABEL IGMP Mode DESCRIPTION Select Standard Mode to have the Device forward multicast packets to a port that joins the multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports. Select Blocking Mode to have the Device block all unknown multicast packets from the WAN. DHCP Server State DHCP Select Enable to have the Device act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent. DHCP Relay Server Address IP Address IP Addressing Values Beginning IP Address Ending IP Address DHCP Server Lease Time Days/Hours/

Minutes DNS Values DNS DNS Server 1 Select Disable to stop the DHCP server on the Device. Select DHCP Relay to have the Device forward DHCP request to the DHCP server. This field is only available when you select DHCP Relay in the DHCP field. Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in this field. This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. This is the period of time DHCP-assigned addresses is used. DHCP automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log in. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time, which means that past addresses are recycled and made available for future reassignment to other systems. This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. Enter the lease time of the DHCP server. This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. Specify which DNS server addresses the Device sends to LAN DHCP clients. Select Dynamic to have the DHCP clients use the Devices LAN IP address as the DNS server address so the Device acts as a proxy for DNS queries. Select Static to manually enter DNS server addresses. Select Obtained from ISP to use the DNS server IP addresses the Devices WAN connection uses. Enter the first and second DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the Device passes to the DHCP clients. DNS Server 2 LAN IPv6 Mode Setup IPv6 State LAN IPv6 Address Setup Delegate prefix from WAN Static ULA Pseudo-

Random Global ID Select Enable to activate the IPv6 mode and configure IPv6 settings on the Device. Select this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider or an uplink router. Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the Devices LAN IPv6 address. A unique local address (ULA) is a unique IPv6 address for use in private networks but not routable in the global IPv6 Internet. Select this to have the Device automatically generate a globally unique address for the LAN IPv6 address. The address format is like fdxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx::/64. ULA IPv6 Address Setup VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 105 Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued) LABEL IPv6 Address DESCRIPTION If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 address prefix that the Device uses for the LAN IPv6 address. If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 prefix length that the Device uses to generate the LAN IPv6 address. Prefix Length MLD Snooping MLD Mode LAN IPv6 Address Assign Setup An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (starting from the left) in the address compose the network address. This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. Select Enable MLD Snooping to activate MLD snooping on the Device. This allows the Device to check MLD packets passing through it and learn the multicast group membership. It helps reduce multicast traffic. Select Standard Mode to have the Device forward IPv6 multicast packets to a port that joins the IPv6 multicast group and broadcast unknown IPv6 multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports. Select Blocking Mode to have the Device block all unknown IPv6 multicast packets from the WAN. Select how you want to obtain an IPv6 address:

stateless + DNS send by RADVD: The Device uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) is enabled to have the Device send IPv6 prefix information in router advertisements periodically and in response to router solicitations. DHCPv6 server is disabled. (See page 102 for more information on RADVD.) stateless + DNS send by DHCPv6: The Device uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. The DNS is provided by a DHCPv6 server. stateful + DHCPv6 server: The Device uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. The DHCPv6 server is enabled to have the Device act as a DHCPv6 server and pass IPv6 addresses, DNS server and domain name information to DHCPv6 clients. stateful + DHCPv6 relay: The Device uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. DHCPv6 Relay is enabled to have the Device relay client DHCPv6 requests. This shows the status of the DHCPv6. DHCPv6 Configuration DHCPv6 State IPv6 DNS Values IPv6 DNS Server 1-3 Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 DNS server information. Select User-Defined if you have the IPv6 address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server IPv6 addresses the Device passes to the DHCP clients. Select None if you do not want to configure IPv6 DNS servers. If DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the first IPv6 address in the pool of addresses that can be assigned to DHCPv6 clients. If DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the last IPv6 address in the pool of addresses that can be assigned to DHCPv6 clients. If DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the domain name to be assigned to DHCPv6 clients. IPv6 Address Values IPv6 Start Address IPv6 End Address IPv6 Domain Name IPv6 Router Advertisement State RADVD State Apply Cancel This shows the status of RADVD. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 106 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7.3 The Static DHCP Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Use this screen to change your Devices static DHCP settings. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP to open the following screen. Figure 52 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new static DHCP entry. Table 32 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP LABEL Add new static lease

Status MAC Address This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the client is connected to the Device. The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation). IP Address Modify/Delete A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address. This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it. Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected entry. If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP entry, the following screen displays. Figure 53 Static DHCP: Add/Edit VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 107 Chapter 7 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen. Select Device Info Table 33 Static DHCP: Add/Edit DESCRIPTION LABEL Active Select this to activate the connection between the client and the Device. Select the interface group name for which you want to configure static DHCP settings. Group Name See Chapter 12 on page 171 for how to create a new interface group. If you select Manual Input, you can manually type in the MAC address and IP address of a computer on your LAN. You can also choose the name of a computer from the drop list and have the MAC Address and IP address auto-detected. If you select Manual Input, enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN. If you select Manual Input, enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. MAC Address IP Address Apply Cancel 7.4 The UPnP Screen Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. See page 102 for more information on UPnP. Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your Device. Click Network Setting >

Home Networking > UPnP to display the screen shown next. Figure 54 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP 108 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP LABEL UPnP DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the Device's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Select Enable to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the Device so that they can communicate through the Device by using NAT traversal. UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application. UPnP NAT-T

Description IP Address External Port Internal Port Apply Cancel The table below displays the NAT port forwarding rules added automatically by UPnP NAT-T. This is the index number of the UPnP NAT-T connection. This is the description of the UPnP NAT-T connection. This is the IP address of the other connected UPnP enabled device. This is the external port number that identifies the service. This is the internal port number that identifies the service. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 7.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP. Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 109 Chapter 7 Home Networking 2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box. Click Details. Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication 3 In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box. Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components 110 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 4 5 Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Next. Restart the computer when prompted. Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 3 In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components . Network Connections 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details. Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 111 Chapter 7 Home Networking 5 In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box. Networking Services 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next. 7.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the Device. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Device. Turn on your computer and the Device. Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. 112 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 2 Right-click the icon and select Properties. Network Connections Chapter 7 Home Networking 3 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Internet Connection Properties VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 113 Chapter 7 Home Networking 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add 5 When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. System Tray Icon 114 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 7 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Internet Connection Status Chapter 7 Home Networking Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the Device without finding out the IP address of the Device first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Device. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. 1 Click Start and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 115 Chapter 7 Home Networking 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places. Network Connections 4 5 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network. Right-click on the icon for your Device and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays. Network Connections: My Network Places 116 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 6 Right-click on the icon for your Device and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the Device. Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example Chapter 7 Home Networking VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 117 Chapter 7 Home Networking 7.7 The Additional Subnet Screen Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP. IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The Device supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet interface with the Device itself as the gateway for the LAN network. When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN's logical network (subnet). If your ISP provides the Public LAN service, the Device may use an LAN IP address that can be accessed from the WAN. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet to display the screen shown next. Figure 55 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet LABEL IP Alias Setup Group Name DESCRIPTION Select the interface group name for which you want to configure the IP alias settings. See Chapter 12 on page 171 for how to create a new interface group. Select the check box to configure a LAN network for the Device. Enter the IP address of your Device in dotted decimal notation. Active IP Address IP Subnet Mask Your Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the Device. Public LAN Active Select the checkbox to enable the Public LAN feature. Your ISP must support Public LAN and Static IP. Enter the public IP address provided by your ISP. IP Address IP Subnet Mask Enter the public IP subnet mask provided by your ISP. 118 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking DESCRIPTION Select the check box to enable the Device to provide public IP addresses by DHCP server. Table 35 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet (continued) LABEL Offer Public IP by DHCP Enable ARP Proxy Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Select the check box to enable the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) proxy. 7.8 The STB Vendor ID Screen Set Top Box (STB) devices with dynamic IP addresses sometimes dont renew their IP addresses before the lease time expires. This could lead to IP address conflicts if the STB continues to use an IP address that gets assigned to another device. Use this screen to list the Vendor IDs of connected STBs to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for them when they request IP addresses. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID to open this screen. Figure 56 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 36 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID LABEL Vendor ID 1 ~

5 Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. DESCRIPTION Enter the STBs vendor ID. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 119 Chapter 7 Home Networking 7.9 The LAN VLAN Screen Click Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLAN to open this screen. Use this screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports. Figure 57 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLAN LABEL Lan Port Tag Operation DESCRIPTION These represent the Devices LAN ports. Select what you want the Device to do to the IEEE 802.1q VLAN ID and priority tags of downstream traffic before sending it out through this LAN port. Unchange - Dont do anything to the traffics VLAN ID and priority tags. Add - Add VLAN ID and priority tags to untagged traffic. Remove - Delete one tag from tagged traffic. If the frame has double tags, this removes the outer tag. This does not affect untagged traffic. Remark - Change the value of the outer VLAN ID and priority tags. Use this option to set what to do for the IEEE 802.1p priority tags when you add or remark the tags for a LAN ports downstream traffic. Either select Unchange to not modify the traffics priority tags or select an priority from 0 to 7 to use. The larger the number, the higher the priority. If you will add or remark tags for this LAN ports downstream traffic, specify the VLAN ID

(from 0 to 4094) to use here. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 802.1P Mark VLAN ID Apply Cancel 7.10 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 120 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7.10.1 LANs, WANs and the Device The actual physical connection determines whether the Device ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 58 LAN and WAN IP Addresses LAN WAN 7.10.2 DHCP Setup DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Device as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. IP Pool Setup The Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers. 7.10.3 DNS Server Addresses DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask. There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses. The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 121 Chapter 7 Home Networking Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The Device supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature. Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen. 7.10.4 LAN TCP/IP The Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the Device. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 122 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;

always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 123 Chapter 7 Home Networking 124 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 8 Routing 8.1 Overview The Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the Devices LAN interface. The Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Devices default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 59 Example of Routing Topology A R3 LAN WAN R1 R2 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 125 Chapter 8 Routing 8.2 The Routing Screen Use this screen to view and configure the static route rules on the Device. Click Network Setting

> Routing > Static Route to open the following screen. Figure 60 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route LABEL Add new static route

Status DESCRIPTION Click this to configure a new static route. Name Destination IP Subnet Mask/

Prefix Length Gateway Interface Modify/Delete This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the static route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active. This is the name that describes or identifies this route. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. This is the WAN interface used for this static route. Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the Device. Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route. 126 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 8.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add new static route in the Routing screen or the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 61 Routing: Add/Edit Chapter 8 Routing The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 39 Routing: Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route. Select this to enable the static route. Clear this to disable this static route without having to delete the entry. Enter a descriptive name for the static route. Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6. Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 network address of the final destination. If you are using IPv4 and need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. Enter the IP subnet mask here. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. If you want to use the gateway IP address, select Enable. Enter the IP address of the gateway. Select the WAN interface you want to use for this static route. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Route Name IP Type Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Use Gateway IP Address Gateway IP Address Use Interface Apply Cancel 8.3 The Policy Forwarding Screen Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest path to forward a packet. Policy forwarding allows the Device to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based routing is applied to outgoing packets, prior to the normal routing. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 127 Chapter 8 Routing You can use source-based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing. The Policy Forwarding screen let you view and configure routing policies on the Device. Click Network Setting > Routing > Policy Forwarding to open the following screen. Figure 62 Network Setting > Routing > Policy Forwarding The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new policy forwarding rule. Table 40 Network Setting > Routing >Policy Forwarding LABEL Add new Policy Forward Rule

Policy Name Source IP Source Subnet Mask Protocol Source Port WAN Modify/Delete This is the index number of the entry. This is the name of the rule. This is the source IP address. his is the source subnet mask address. This is the transport layer protocol. This is the source port number. This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed. Click the Edit icon to edit this policy. Click the Delete icon to remove a policy from the Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the policy. 128 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 8.3.1 Add/Edit Policy Forwarding Click Add new Policy Forward Rule in the Policy Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to a policy. Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route. Figure 63 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit Chapter 8 Routing The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 41 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit LABEL Policy Name DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name of up to 8 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces. Enter the source IP address. Enter the source subnet mask address. Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP). Enter the source port number. Enter the source MAC address. Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN interface(s) already configured in the Broadband screens. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Source IP Source Subnet Mask Protocol Source Port Source MAC WAN Apply Cancel 8.4 RIP Routing Information Protocol (RIP, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a device to exchange routing information with other routers. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 129 Chapter 8 Routing 8.4.1 The RIP Screen Click Network Setting > Routing > RIP to open the RIP screen. Figure 64 RIP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 42 RIP LABEL

Interface Version Operation Enabled Apply DESCRIPTION This is the index of the interface in which the RIP setting is used. This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used. The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Device sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2 carries more information. RIP version 1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Select Passive to have the Device update the routing table based on the RIP packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route information to other routers in this interface. Select Active to have the Device advertise its route information and also listen for routing updates from neighboring routers. Select the check box to activate the settings. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. 130 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 9 Quality of Service (QoS) 9.1 Overview Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a networks ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-

demand. Configure QoS on the Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:

1 2 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows. Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow. The Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video. This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers. 9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The General screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth (Section 9.3 on page 133). The Queue Setup screen lets you configure QoS queue assignment (Section 9.4 on page 134). The Class Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section 9.5 on page 136). The Policer Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS policers (Section 9.5 on page 136). The Monitor screen lets you view the Device's QoS-related packet statistics (Section 9.7 on page 143). VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 131 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) 9.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types. CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. Tagging and Marking In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker. Traffic Shaping Bursty traffic may cause network congestion. Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted with a pre-configured data transmission rate using buffers (or queues). Your Device uses the Token Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate. Traffic Rate Traffic Rate c i f f a r T c i f f a r T Time Time

(Before Traffic Shaping)

(After Traffic Shaping) 132 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user-defined criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding or violating the criteria. Traffic Rate Traffic Rate c i f f a r T c i f f a r T Time Time

(Before Traffic Policing)

(After Traffic Policing) The Device supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms: Token Bucket Filter (TBF), Single Rate Two Color Maker (srTCM), and Two Rate Two Color Marker (trTCM). You can specify actions which are performed on the colored packets. See Section 9.8 on page 144 for more information on each metering algorithm. 9.3 The Quality of Service General Screen Click Network Setting > QoS > General to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. See Section 9.1 on page 131 for more information. Figure 65 Network Settings > QoS > General VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 133 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 43 Network Setting > QoS > General LABEL QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth DESCRIPTION Select the Enable check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance. Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces actual transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interfaces speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps. LAN Managed Downstream Bandwidth Upstream traffic priority Assigned by You can set this number higher than the interfaces actual transmission speed. The Device uses up to 95% of the DSL ports actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than the DSL ports actual transmission speed. You can also set this number lower than the interfaces actual transmission speed. This will cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth. If you leave this field blank, the Device automatically sets this number to be 95% of the WAN interfaces actual upstream transmission speed. Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN interfaces (including WLAN) that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the WAN interfaces actual transmission speed. For example, set the LAN managed downstream bandwidth to 100000 kbps if you use a 100 Mbps wired Ethernet WAN connection. You can also set this number lower than the WAN interfaces actual transmission speed. This will cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth. If you leave this field blank, the Device automatically sets this to the LAN interfaces maximum supported connection speed. Select how the Device assigns priorities to various upstream traffic flows. None: Disables auto priority mapping and has the Device put packets into the queues according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not match any of the classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority. Ethernet Priority: Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level. IP Precedence: Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS field in the IP header. Packet Length: Automatically assign priority based on the packet size. Smaller packets get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, internet gaming, or other real-time packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like file transfers. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 9.4 The Queue Setup Screen Click Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next. 134 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment. Figure 66 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 44 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup LABEL Add new Queue Click this button to create a new queue entry.

Status Name Interface Priority Weight Buffer Management Rate Limit Modify/Delete This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active. This shows the descriptive name of this queue. This shows the name of the Devices interface through which traffic in this queue passes. This shows the priority of this queue. This shows the weight of this queue. This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue. Queue management algorithms determine how the Device should handle packets when it receives too many (network congestion). This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue. Click the Edit icon to edit the queue. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 135 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) 9.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue Click Add new Queue or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue. Figure 67 Queue Setup: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 45 Queue Setup: Add LABEL Active Name Interface DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable this queue. Enter the descriptive name of this queue. Select the interface to which this queue is applied. Priority Weight Buffer Management Rate Limit OK Cancel This field is read-only if you are editing the queue. Select the priority level (from 1 to 7) of this queue. The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested. Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue. If two queues have the same priority level, the Device divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. This field displays Drop Tail (DT). Drop Tail (DT) is a simple queue management algorithm that allows the Device buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full. Once the buffer is full, new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again (packets are transmitted out of it). Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 9.5 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, 136 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow. You can give different priorities to traffic that the Device forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Click Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup to open the following screen. Figure 68 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 46 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup LABEL Add new Classifier

Status DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new classifier. This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active. This is the name of the classifier. This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier. This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier. This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier. This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier. This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put. Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier. Class Name Classification Criteria DSCP Mark 802.1P Mark VLAN ID Tag To Queue Modify/Delete Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 137 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) 9.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class Click Add new Classifier in the Class Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a classifier to open the following screen. Figure 69 Class Setup: Add/Edit 138 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Class Setup: Add/Edit DESCRIPTION LABEL Active Select this to enable this classifier. Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, not including Class Name spaces. Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply. Classification Order From Interface Ether Type Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list. If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface, select an interface from the From Interface drop-down list box. Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic. If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address, IP address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type. If you select 802.1Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level. Source Address Subnet Netmask Port Range MAC MAC Mask Exclude Destination Address Subnet Netmask Port Range MAC MAC Mask Exclude Others Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Enter the source subnet mask. If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Enter the source subnet mask. If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 139 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 47 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Service IP Protocol DHCP Packet Length DSCP 802.1P VLAN ID TCP ACK Exclude DSCP Mark 802.1P Mark VLAN ID This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application. When you select a predefined application, you do not configure the rest of the filter fields. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP, UDP, ICMP or IGMP. If you select User defined, enter the protocol (service type) number. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select a DHCP option. If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Vendor Class Identifier

(Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter a string that identifies the users category or application type in the matched DHCP packets. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500) in the fields provided. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided. This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-down list box.

"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest. This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field. Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge) flag. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the Device replaces the DSCP field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the Device keep the DSCP field in the packets. Select a priority level with which the Device replaces the IEEE 802.1p priority field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the Device keep the 802.1p priority field in the packets. If you select Remark, enter a VLAN ID number with which the Device replaces the VLAN ID of the frames. If you select Remove, the Device deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out. If you select Add, the Device treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID. Forward to Interface If you select Unchange, the Device keep the VLAN ID in the packets. Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out. If you select Unchange, the Device forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table. 140 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 47 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL To Queue Index Select a queue that applies to this class. DESCRIPTION Apply Cancel You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 9.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen Use this screen to configure QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming traffic. Click Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup. The screen appears as shown. Figure 70 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 48 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup LABEL Add new Policer Click this to create a new entry.

Status Name Regulated Classes Meter Type Rule Action Modify/Delete This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the policer is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active. This field displays the descriptive name of this policer. This field displays the name of a QoS classifier This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer. These are the rates and burst sizes against which the policer checks the traffic of the member QoS classes. This shows the how the policer has the Device treat different types of traffic belonging to the policers member QoS classes. Click the Edit icon to edit the policer. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing policer. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 141 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) 9.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer Click Add new Policer in the Policer Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the following screen. Figure 71 Policer Setup: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 49 Policer Setup: Add/Edit LABEL Active Name Meter Type DESCRIPTION Select the check box to activate this policer. Enter the descriptive name of this policer. This shows the traffic metering algorithm used in this policer. The Simple Token Bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. Each token represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size. The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR), the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and the Excess Burst Size (EBS). The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). Specify the committed rate. When the incoming traffic rate of the member QoS classes is less than the committed rate, the device applies the conforming action to the traffic. Specify the committed burst size for packet bursts. This must be equal to or less than the peak burst size (two rate three color) or excess burst size (single rate three color) if it is also configured. This is the maximum size of the (first) token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm. Committed Rate Committed Burst Size 142 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 49 Policer Setup: Add/Edit LABEL Conforming Action DESCRIPTION Specify what the Device does for packets within the committed rate and burst size (green-

marked packets). Pass: Send the packets without modification. DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to use. Non-

Conforming Action Specify what the Device does for packets that exceed the excess burst size or peak rate and burst size (red-marked packets). Drop: Discard the packets. DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to use. The packets may be dropped if there is congestion on the network. Available Class Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the QoS classifier. Selected Class Highlight a QoS classifier in the Available Class box and use the > button to move it to the Selected Class box. Apply Cancel To remove a QoS classifier from the Selected Class box, select it and use the < button. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 9.7 The QoS Monitor Screen To view the Devices QoS packet statistics, click Network Setting > QoS > Monitor. The screen appears as shown. Figure 72 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 50 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor LABEL Refresh Interval DESCRIPTION Enter how often you want the Device to update this screen. Select No Refresh to stop refreshing statistics. Interface Monitor

This is the index number of the entry. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 143 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) DESCRIPTION This shows the name of the interface on the Device. This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are transmitted successfully. This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are dropped. Table 50 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor (continued) LABEL Name Pass Rate Drop Rate Queue Monitor

Name Pass Rate Drop Rate This is the index number of the entry. This shows the name of the queue. This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted successfully. This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped. 9.8 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described in this chapter. IEEE 802.1Q Tag The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p). Table 51 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL Level 7 Level 6 TRAFFIC TYPE Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages. Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter. Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network Architecture) transactions. Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. This is for spare bandwidth. This is typically used for non-critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Typically used for best-effort traffic. Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 0 144 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet types. DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going. DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits) The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest. Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the Device, the Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 145 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the Device. On the Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested. Table 52 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping IP PACKET LENGTH (BYTE)

>1100 250~1100

<250 PRIORITY QUEUE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 2 IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY

(ETHERNET PRIORITY) 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 3 TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DSCP 000000 000000 001110 001100 001010 001000 010110 010100 010010 010000 011110 011100 011010 011000 100110 100100 100010 100000 101110 101000 110000 111000 Token Bucket The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The bucket stores tokens, each of which represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size, so the bucket can hold up to b tokens. Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate. The following shows how tokens work with packets:

A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the bucket. 146 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide If there are no tokens in the bucket, the Device stops transmitting until enough tokens are generated. Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) If not enough tokens are available, the Device treats the packet in either one of the following ways:

In traffic shaping:

Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket. In traffic policing:

Drops it. Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark. The Device may drop these marked packets if the network is overloaded. Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface can support. It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interfaces capability. The smaller the bucket size, the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be dropped. A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size. For example, use a bucket size of 10 kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps. Single Rate Three Color Marker The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM, defined in RFC 2697) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to one user-defined rate, the Committed Information Rate

(CIR), and two burst sizes: the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Excess Burst Size (EBS). The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (CBS and EBS). Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate, called Committed Information Rate

(CIR). When the first bucket (CBS) is full, new tokens overflow into the second bucket (EBS). All packets are evaluated against the CBS. If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green. Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS. If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow. If it exceeds the EBS then it is marked red. The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM:

A packet arrives. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the CBS bucket. If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket, the Device checks the EBS bucket. The packet is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket. Otherwise, the packet is marked red. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped. Two Rate Three Color Marker The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM, defined in RFC 2698) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user-defined rates: the Committed Information Rate

(CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network. The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR. CIR and PIR values are based VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 147 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client. The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (Committed Burst Size

(CBS) and Peak Burst Size (PBS)). Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR and PIR respectively. All packets are evaluated against the PIR. If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red. Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR. If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow. Finally, if it is below the CIR then it is marked green. The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM:

A packet arrives. If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet (in bytes), the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped. If the PBS bucket has enough tokens, the Device checks the CBS bucket. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). Otherwise, the packet is marked yellow. 148 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) 10.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Device. NAT (Network Address Translation -

NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 10.2 on page 150). Use the Applications screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 10.3 on page 153). Use the Port Triggering screen to add and configure the Devices trigger port settings (Section 10.4 on page 155). Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server (Section 10.5 on page 158). Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device (Section 10.6 on page 158). Use the Address Mapping screen to configure the Device's address mapping settings (Section 10.7 on page 159). 10.1.2 What You Need To Know Inside/Outside Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/Local Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. NAT In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber

(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 149 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world. Finding Out More See Section 10.8 on page 161 for advanced technical information on NAT. 10.2 The Port Forwarding Screen Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example) Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a 150 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 73 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 LAN B=192.168.1.34 WAN 192.168.1.1 IP Address assigned by ISP C=192.168.1.3 D=192.168.1.36 Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen. Figure 74 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 53 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding LABEL Add new rule

Status DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new rule. This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. This shows the services name. This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. This field displays the incoming packets destination IP address. This is the servers IP address. This is the first external port number that identifies a service. This is the last external port number that identifies a service. This is the first internal port number that identifies a service. Service Name WAN Interface WAN IP Server IP Address Start Port End Port Translation Start Port VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 151 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 53 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued) LABEL Translation End Port Protocol DESCRIPTION This is the last internal port number that identifies a service. This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server, whether it is TCP, UDP, or TCP/

UDP. Click the Edit icon to edit this rule. Modify/Delete Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. 10.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding Click Add new rule in the Port Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to open the following screen. Figure 75 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 54 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit LABEL Active Service Name WAN Interface DESCRIPTION Clear the checkbox to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it. Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on). Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled. 152 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 54 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL WAN IP DESCRIPTION Enter the WAN IP address for which the incoming service is destined. If the packets destination IP address doesnt match the one specified here, the port forwarding rule will not be applied. Enter the original destination port for the packets. Start Port End Port Translation Start Port Translation End Port Server IP Address Protocol OK Cancel To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field. To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field. Enter the last port of the original destination port range. To forward only one port, enter the port number in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above. This shows the port number to which you want the Device to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated. This shows the last port of the translated port range. Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here. Select the protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 10.3 The Applications Screen This screen provides a summary of all NAT applications and their configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to create new applications and/or remove existing ones. To access this screen, click Network Setting > NAT > Applications. The following screen appears. Figure 76 Network Setting > NAT > Applications VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 153 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new NAT application rule. Table 55 Network Setting > NAT > Applications LABEL Add new application Application Forwarded WAN Interface Server IP Address Delete Click the Delete icon to delete the rule. This field shows the type of application that the service forwards. This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. This field displays the destination IP address for the service. 10.3.1 Add New Application This screen lets you create new NAT application rules. Click Add new application in the Applications screen to open the following screen. Figure 77 Applications: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Applications: Add LABEL WAN Interface Server IP Address Application Category Application Forwarded View Rule OK Cancel DESCRIPTION Select the WAN interface that you want to apply this NAT rule to. Enter the inside IP address of the application here. Select the category of the application from the drop-down list box. Select a service from the drop-down list box and the Device automatically configures the protocol, start, end, and map port number that define the service. Click this to display the configuration of the service that you have chosen in Application Fowarded. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 154 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 10.4 The Port Triggering Screen Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service

(coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address. Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The Device records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the Device's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("open" port), the Device forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computers connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application. For example:

Figure 78 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example 1 2 3 4 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070). Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the Device to record Janes computer IP address. The Device associates Jane's computer IP address with the "open" port range of 6970-7170. The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170. The Device forwards the traffic to Janes computer IP address. 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The Device times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol) or two hours with TCP/IP

(Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 155 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering to open the following screen. Use this screen to view your Devices trigger port settings. Figure 79 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering LABEL Add new rule

Status DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new rule. This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. This field displays the name of the service used by this rule. This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. Service Name WAN Interface Trigger Start Port This is the first port number that identifies a service. This is the last port number that identifies a service. Trigger End Port Trigger Proto. Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. This is the trigger transport layer protocol. Open End Port Open Proto. Modify/Delete This is the first port number that identifies a service. This is the last port number that identifies a service. This is the open transport layer protocol. Click the Edit icon to edit this rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. 156 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) 10.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule This screen lets you create new port triggering rules. Click Add new rule in the Port Triggering screen or click a rules Edit icon to open the following screen. Figure 80 Port Triggering: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit LABEL Active Service Name WAN Interface Trigger Start Port DESCRIPTION Select the check box to enable this rule. Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on). Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules. The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Trigger End Port Trigger Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. Open End Port Open Protocol OK Cancel Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 157 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) 10.5 The DMZ Screen In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen. Figure 81 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 59 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ LABEL Default Server Address DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 10.6 The ALG Screen Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream. When the Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the Devices private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your Device is behind a SIP ALG. Use this screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device. To access this screen, click Network Setting > NAT > ALG. Figure 82 Network Setting > NAT > ALG 158 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 60 Network Setting > NAT > ALG LABEL NAT ALG DESCRIPTION Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM applications work correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules. Enable this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and address-

mapping rules. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. SIP ALG Apply Cancel 10.7 The Address Mapping Screen Ordering your rules is important because the Device applies the rules in the order that you specify. When a rule matches the current packet, the Device takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored. Click Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping to display the following screen. Figure 83 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 61 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping LABEL Add new rule Set Local Start IP Local End IP DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new rule. This is the index number of the address mapping set. This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). This is the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types. This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type. This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and Many-to-One mapping types. Global Start IP Global End IP VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 159 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 61 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping (continued) LABEL Type DESCRIPTION This is the address mapping type. One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type. Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the Device's Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only. Modify/Delete Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action. 10.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule To add or edit an address mapping rule, click Add new rule or the rules edit icon in the Address Mapping screen to display the screen shown next. Figure 84 Address Mapping: Add/Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 62 Address Mapping: Add/Edit LABEL Type DESCRIPTION Choose the IP/port mapping type from one of the following. One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type. Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the Device's Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only. Local Start IP Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Enter the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). 160 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 62 Address Mapping: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Local End IP DESCRIPTION Enter the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types. Enter the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type. Enter the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and Many-to-One mapping types. Select the number of the mapping set for which you want to configure. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Global Start IP Global End IP Set OK Cancel 10.8 Technical Reference This part contains more information regarding NAT. 10.8.1 NAT Definitions Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 161 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 63 NAT Definitions ITEM Inside Outside Local Global DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. This refers to the host on the WAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. 10.8.2 What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber

(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-

to-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). 162 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 10.8.3 How NAT Works Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 85 How NAT Works LAN 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.12 SA 192.168.1.10 WAN NAT Table Inside Local IP Address 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.13 Inside Global IP Address IGA 1 IGA 2 IGA 3 IGA 4 SA IGA1 Inside Local Address (ILA) Inside Global Address (IGA) 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.10 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 163 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) 10.8.4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs using IP alias) behind the Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks. Figure 86 NAT Application With IP Alias Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT. Table 64 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES ECHO FTP (File Transfer Protocol) SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) DNS (Domain Name System) Finger HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) POP3 (Post Office Protocol) NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) SNMP trap PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) PORT NUMBER 7 21 25 53 79 80 110 119 161 162 1723 164 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Port Forwarding Example Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 87 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 192.168.1.1 B=192.168.1.34 C=192.168.1.35 D=192.168.1.36 IP address assigned by ISP VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 165 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) 166 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 11 Dynamic DNS Setup 11.1 Overview DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it. In addition to the system DNS server(s), each WAN interface (service) is set to have its own static or dynamic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). The Device uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify in the Broadband screen) to resolve domain names that do not match any DNS routing entry. After the Device receives a DNS reply from a DNS server, it creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table. Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the DNS Entry screen to view, configure, or remove DNS routes (Section 11.2 on page 168). Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the Device

(Section 11.3 on page 169). VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 167 Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS Setup 11.1.2 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. 11.2 The DNS Entry Screen Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the Device. Click Network Setting > DNS to open the DNS Entry screen. Figure 88 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new DNS entry. Table 65 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry LABEL Add new DNS entry

Hostname IP Address Modify/Delete This is the index number of the entry. This indicates the host name or domain name. This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer. Click the Edit icon to edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. 168 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS Setup 11.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry You can manually add or edit the Devices DNS name and IP address entry. Click Add new DNS entry in the DNS Entry screen or the Edit icon next to the entry you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 89 DNS Entry: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 66 DNS Entry: Add/Edit DESCRIPTION LABEL Host Name Enter the host name of the DNS entry. Enter the IP address of the DNS entry. IP Address Click Apply to save your changes. Apply Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Cancel 11.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen Use this screen to change your Devices DDNS. Click Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 90 Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 169 Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 67 Network Setting > DNS > > Dynamic DNS LABEL Dynamic DNS Service Provider Hostname DESCRIPTION Select Enable to use dynamic DNS. Select your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop-down list box. Type the domain name assigned to your Device by your Dynamic DNS provider. Username Password Email Key Apply Cancel You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). Type your user name. Type the password assigned to you. If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the user name you used to register for this service. If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the password you used to register for this service. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 170 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 12 Interface Group 12.1 Overview By default, all LAN and WAN interfaces on the Device are in the same group and can communicate with each other. Create interface groups to have the Device assign the IP addresses in different domains to different groups. Each group acts as an independent network on the Device. This lets devices connected to an interface groups LAN interfaces communicate through the interface groups WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces. 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Interface Group screens let you create multiple networks on the Device (Section 12.2 on page 171). 12.2 The Interface Group Screen You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group. Alternatively, you can have the Device automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface group. Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the Device assigns to the clients in the default and/or user-defined groups. If you set the Device to assign IP addresses based on the clients DHCP Vendor ID option information, you must enable DHCP server and configure LAN TCP/IP settings for both the default and user-defined groups. See Chapter 7 on page 101 for more information. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 171 Chapter 12 Interface Group In the following example, the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT 5.0 (meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client) is assigned the IP address 192.168.2.2 and uses the WAN VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 interface. Figure 91 Interface Grouping Application Default: ETH 2~4 192.168.1.x/24 192.168.2.x/24 DHCP Vendor ID option: MSFT 5.0 eth10.0 VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 Internet Click Network Setting > Interface Group to open the following screen. Figure 92 Network Setting > Interface Group The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this button to create a new interface group. Table 68 Network Setting > Interface Group LABEL Add New Interface Group Group Name WAN Interface LAN Interfaces Criteria Modify/Delete Add This shows the descriptive name of the group. This shows the WAN interfaces in the group. This shows the LAN interfaces in the group. This shows the filtering criteria for the group. Click the Delete icon to remove the group. Click this button to create a new group. 12.2.1 Interface Group Configuration Click the Add New Interface Group button in the Interface Group screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to create a new interface group. 172 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Note: An interface can belong to only one group at a time. Figure 93 Interface Group Configuration Chapter 12 Interface Group The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 69 Interface Group Configuration LABEL Group Name DESCRIPTION Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters, numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed. Select the WAN interface this group uses. The group can have up to one PTM interface, up to one ATM interface and up to one ETH interface. Select None to not add a WAN interface to this group. Select one or more LAN interfaces (Ethernet LAN, HPNA or wireless LAN) in the Available LAN Interfaces list and use the left arrow to move them to the Grouped LAN Interfaces list to add the interfaces to this group. To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN Interfaces, use the right-facing arrow. Click Add to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as the type of the hardware or firmware. See Section 12.2.2 on page 174 for more information. This shows the index number of the rule. WAN Interface used in the grouping Grouped LAN Interfaces Available LAN Interfaces Automatically Add Clients With the following DHCP Vendor IDs

VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 173 Chapter 12 Interface Group Table 69 Interface Group Configuration (continued) LABEL Filter Criteria DESCRIPTION This shows the filtering criteria. The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received will belong to this group automatically. This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled. WildCard Support Remove Apply Cancel Click the Remove icon to delete this rule from the Device. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 12.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open the following screen. Figure 94 Interface Grouping Criteria The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 70 Interface Grouping Criteria LABEL Source MAC Address DHCP Option 60 DESCRIPTION Enter the source MAC address of the packet. Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. Select this option to be able to use wildcards in the Vendor Class Identifier configured for DHCP option 60. Enable wildcard on DHCP option 60 option DHCP Option 61 Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic. 174 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 12 Interface Group Table 70 Interface Grouping Criteria (continued) LABEL IAID DESCRIPTION Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the device, for example, the WAN connection index number. Select DUID-LLT (DUID Based on Link-layer Address Plus Time) to enter the hardware type, a time value and the MAC address of the device. DUID type DHCP Option 125 Enterprise Number Manufactur er OUI Product Class Model Name Serial Number Select DUID-EN (DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise Number) to enter the vendors registered enterprise number. Select DUID-LL (DUID Based on Link-layer Address) to enter the devices hardware type and hardware address (MAC address) in the following fields. Select Other to enter any string that identifies the device in the DUID field. Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic. Enter the vendors 32-bit enterprise number registered with the IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority). Specify the vendors OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually the first three bytes of the MAC address. Enter the product class of the device. Enter the model name of the device. Enter the serial number of the device. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 175 Chapter 12 Interface Group 176 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 13 USB Service 13.1 Overview The Device has a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive. In the USB Service screens, you can enable file-sharing server, media server, and printer server. 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the File Sharing screen to enable file-sharing server (Section 13.2 on page 178). Use the Media Server screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files (Section 13.3 on page 180). Use the Printer Server screen to enable the print server (Section 13.4 on page 181). 13.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. 13.1.2.1 About File Sharing Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network. Shares When settings are set to default, each USB device connected to the Device is given a folder, called a share. If a USB hard drive connected to the Device has more than one partition, then each partition will be allocated a share. You can also configure a share to be a sub-folder or file on the USB device. File Systems A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems. The file sharing feature on your Device supports File Allocation Table (FAT) and FAT32. Common Internet File System The Device uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its file sharing functions. CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the Device. CIFS VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 177 Chapter 13 USB Service protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility). 13.1.2.2 About Printer Server Print Server This is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers, and which sends print jobs to each printer from the computer itself or other devices. Operating System An operating system (OS) is the interface which helps you manage a computer. Common examples are Microsoft Windows, Mac OS or Linux. TCP/IP TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol) is a set of communications protocols that most of the Internet runs on. Port A port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer, such as a process run by your web browser. When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer, the port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for. Supported OSs Your operating system must support TCP/IP ports for printing and be compatible with the RAW (port 9100) protocol. The following OSs support Devices printer sharing feature. Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 SE (Second Edition), Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP or Macintosh OS X. 13.2 The File Sharing Screen You can share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your Device with users on your network. 178 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide The following figure is an overview of the Devices file server feature. Computers A and B can access files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the Device. Chapter 13 USB Service Figure 95 File Sharing Overview B C A The Device will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network administrator. 13.2.1 Before You Begin Make sure the Device is connected to your network and turned on. 1 2 Connect the USB device to one of the Devices USB port. Make sure the Device is connected to your network. The Device detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by the Device, see the troubleshooting for suggestions. Use this screen to set up file sharing using the Device. To access this screen, click Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing. Figure 96 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 179 Chapter 13 USB Service Each field is described in the following table. DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate file sharing through the Device. Table 71 Network Setting > Home Networking > File Sharing LABEL File Sharing Services Host Name Apply Cancel Enter the host name on the share. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 13.3 The Media Server Screen The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from the USB storage device connected to your Device (without having to copy them to another computer). The Device can function as a DLNA-compliant media server. The Device streams files to DLNA-compliant media clients (like Windows Media Player). The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network. The Device media server enables you to:

Publish all shares for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the Device. Use hardware-based media clients like the DMA-2500 to play the files. Note: Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares. No user name and password or other form of security is used. The media server is enabled by default with the video, photo, and music shares published. To change your Devices media server settings, click Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server. The screen appears as shown. Figure 97 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server 180 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 13 USB Service The following table describes the labels in this menu. Table 72 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server LABEL Media Server DESCRIPTION Select Enable to have the Device function as a DLNA-compliant media server. Enable the media server to let (DLNA-compliant) media clients on your network play media files located in the shares. Select the interface on which you want to enable the media server function. Enter the path clients use to access the media files on a USB storage device connected to the Device. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Interface Media Library Path Apply Cancel 13.4 The Printer Server Screen The Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN. You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the Device and then configuring a TCP/IP port on the computers connected to your network. Figure 98 Sharing a USB Printer 13.4.1 Before You Begin To configure the print server you need the following:

Your Device must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network. The USB printer must be connected to your Device. A USB printer with the driver already installed on your computer. The computers on your network must have the printer software already installed before they can create a TCP/IP port for printing via the network. Follow your printer manufacturers instructions on how to install the printer software on your computer. Note: Your printers installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your computer. Connect your printer to the Device instead. Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your Device. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 181 Chapter 13 USB Service To access this screen, click Network Setting > USB Service > Printer Server. Figure 99 Network Setting > USB Service > Printer Server The following table describes the labels in this menu. DESCRIPTION Select Enable to have the Device share a USB printer. Enter the name of the printer. Enter the manufacturer and model number of the printer. Table 73 Network Setting > USB Service > Print Server LABEL Printer Server Printer Name Make and model Printer Name Apply Cancel This displays the system name for the printer. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 182 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 14 Firewall 14.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the Devices security settings. Use the firewall to protect your Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. By default the firewall:

allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks. blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN. The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4). Figure 100 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN A 1 2 3 4 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the Device (Section 14.2 on page 185). Use the Service screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall rules (Section 14.3 on page 185). Use the Access Control screen to view and configure incoming/outgoing filtering rules (Section 14.4 on page 188). Use the DoS screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks (.Section 14.5 on page 190). VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 183 Chapter 14 Firewall 14.1.2 What You Need to Know SYN Attack A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYN-

ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests, making the system unavailable for legitimate users. DoS Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks. DDoS A DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby causing denial of service for users of the targeted system. LAND Attack In a LAND attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself. Ping of Death Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or reboot. SPI Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN. 184 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 14 Firewall 14.2 The Firewall Screen Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the Device. Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. Click Security > Firewall to display the General screen. Figure 101 Security > Firewall > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 74 Security > Firewall > General LABEL Firewall Easy Medium High Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate the firewall feature on the Device. Select Easy to allow LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions. Select Medium to allow LAN to WAN but deny WAN to LAN packet directions. Select High to deny LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 14.3 The Service Screen You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Service screen. For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) website. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 185 Chapter 14 Firewall Click Security > Firewall > Service to display the following screen. Figure 102 Security > Firewall > Service The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new service. Table 75 Security > Firewall > Service LABEL Add new service entry Name Description Ports/Protocol Number Modify/Delete This is the name of your customized service. This is the description of your customized service. This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP) and the port number or range of ports that defines your customized service. Other and the protocol number displays if the service uses another IP protocol. Click the Edit icon to edit the entry. Click the Delete icon to remove this entry. 186 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 14 Firewall 14.3.1 Add/Edit a Service Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewalls ACL rule configuration. Click Add new service entry or the edit icon next to an existing service rule in the Service screen to display the following screen. Figure 103 Service: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 76 Service: Add/Edit LABEL Protocol DESCRIPTION Choose the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. Select Other to be able to enter a protocol number. These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UDP as the IP port. Select Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service. If you select Any, the service is applied to all ports. Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service. This field is displayed if you select Other as the protocol. Enter the protocol number of your customized port. Click this to add the protocol to the Rule List below. This is the IP port (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port. For TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP protocol rules this shows the port number or range that defines the custom service. For other IP protocol rules this shows the protocol number. Click the Delete icon to remove the rule. Source/

Destination Port Protocol Number Add Rule List Protocol Ports/Protocol Number Modify/Delete VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 187 Chapter 14 Firewall Table 76 Service: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Service Name DESCRIPTION Enter a unique name (up to 32 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces) for your customized port. Enter a description for your customized port. Service Description Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 14.4 The Access Control Screen Click Security > Firewall > Access Control to display the following screen. This screen displays a list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules. Figure 104 Security > Firewall > Access Control The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic. Table 77 Security > Firewall > Access Control LABEL Add new ACL rule

Name Src IP This is the index number of the entry. This displays the name of the rule. This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to Any. This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank destination address is equivalent to Any. This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service and the direction of traffic to which this rule applies. This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets (DROP), discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender

(REJECT) or allows the passage of packets (ACCEPT). Click the Edit icon to edit the rule. Dst IP Service Action Modify/Delete Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. Click the Move To icon to change the order of the rule. Enter the number in the # field. 188 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 14.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule Click Add new ACL rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Control screen. The following screen displays. Figure 105 Access Control: Add/Edit Chapter 14 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 78 Access Control: Add/Edit LABEL Filter Name DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including spaces, underscores, and dashes. You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule. This field is read-only if you are editing the ACL rule. Select the order of the ACL rule. Select the source device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address, enter the source IP address in the field below. Enter the source IP address. Select the destination device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address, enter the destiniation IP address in the field below. Enter the destination IP address. Order Select Source Device Source IP Address Select Destination Device Destination IP Address VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 189 Chapter 14 Firewall Table 78 Access Control: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL IP Type Select Protocol DESCRIPTION Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6. Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Security > Firewall > Service >

Add screen display in this list. Protocol If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Specific Service. This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol. Custom Source Port Custom Destination Port Policy Direction Enable Rate Limit Choose the IP port (TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, or ICMPv6) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol. Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source. This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol. Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination. Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (DROP), deny and send an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of (REJECT) or allow the passage of

(ACCEPT) packets that match this rule. Use the drop-down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies. Select this check box to set a limit on the upstream/downstream transmission rate for the specified protocol. Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is. Scheduler Rules Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop-down list box. You can configure a new schedule rule by click Add New Rule. This will bring you to the Security > Scheduler Rules screen. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Apply Cancel 14.5 The DoS Screen DoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access becomes unavailable. Use the DoS screen to activate protection against DoS attacks. Click Security > Firewall > DoS to display the following screen. Figure 106 Security > Firewall > DoS 190 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 14 Firewall DESCRIPTION Select Enable to enable protection against DoS attacks. Table 79 Security > Firewall > DoS LABEL DoS Protection Blocking Deny Ping Response Apply Cancel Select Enable to block ping request packets. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 191 Chapter 14 Firewall 192 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 15 MAC Filter 15.1 Overview You can configure the Device to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the MAC Filter screen. This applies to wired and wireless connections. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen. 15.2 The MAC Filter Screen Use this screen to allow wireless and LAN clients access to the Device. Click Security > MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 107 Security > MAC Filter VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 193 Chapter 15 MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 80 Security > MAC Filter LABEL MAC Address Filter Select Enable to activate the MAC filter function. Set Allow DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the MAC address. Select Allow to permit access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Device. Host name MAC Address Apply Cancel If you clear this, the MAC Address field for this set clears. Enter the host name of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the Device. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 194 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 16 Parental Control 16.1 Overview Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also define time periods and days during which the Device performs parental control on a specific user. 16.2 The Parental Control Screen Use this screen to enable parental control, view the parental control rules and schedules. Click Security > Parental Control to open the following screen. Figure 108 Security > Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate parental control. Table 81 Security > Parental Control LABEL Parental Control Add new PCP

Status Click this if you want to configure a new parental control rule. This shows the index number of the rule. This indicates whether the rule is active or not. PCP Name A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. This shows the name of the rule. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 195 Chapter 16 Parental Control DESCRIPTION This shows the MAC address of the LAN users computer to which this rule applies. Table 81 Security > Parental Control (continued) LABEL Home Network User (MAC) Internet Access Schedule Network Service Website Block Modify/Delete This shows the day(s) and time on which parental control is enabled. This shows whether the network service is configured. If not, None will be shown. This shows whether the website block is configured. If not, None will be shown. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 16.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Rule Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to edit it. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and/or URL filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites. Figure 109 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit 196 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide The following table describes the fields in this screen. Chapter 16 Parental Control DESCRIPTION Table 82 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit LABEL General Active Parental Control Profile Name Home Network User Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule. Enter a descriptive name for the rule. Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If you select Custom, enter the LAN users MAC address. If you select All, the rule applies to all LAN users. Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform parental control. Drag the time bar to define the time that the LAN user is allowed access. Internet Access Schedule Day Time Network Service Network Service Setting If you select Block, the Device prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below. Add new service

Service Name Protocol:Port Modify/Delete Blocked Site/

URL Keyword Apply Cancel If you select Allow, the Device blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below. Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule. You can configure the Service Name, Protocol, and Name of the new rule. This shows the index number of the rule. Select the checkbox next to the rule to activate it. This shows the name of the rule. This shows the protocol and the port of the rule. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Click Add to show a screen to enter the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the Device blocks access. Click Delete to remove it. Click this button to save your settings back to the Device. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 197 Chapter 16 Parental Control 198 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 17 Scheduler Rule 17.1 Overview You can define time periods and days during which the Device performs scheduled rules of certain features (such as Firewall Access Control) in the Scheduler Rule screen. 17.2 The Scheduler Rule Screen Use this screen to view, add, or edit time schedule rules. Click Security > Scheduler Rule to open the following screen. Figure 110 Security > Scheduler Rule The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 83 Security > Scheduler Rule LABEL Add new rule

Rule Name Day Time Description Modify/Delete DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new rule. This is the index number of the entry. This shows the name of the rule. This shows the day(s) on which this rule is enabled. This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled. This shows the description of this rule. Click the Edit icon to edit the schedule. Click the Delete icon to delete a scheduler rule. Note: You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a certain feature. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 199 Chapter 17 Scheduler Rule 17.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule Click the Add button in the Scheduler Rule screen or click the Edit icon next to a schedule rule to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule. Figure 111 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 84 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit LABEL Rule Name DESCRIPTION Enter a name (up to 31 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces) for this schedule. Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform this scheduler rule. Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which the rule will be enforced. Day Time if Day Range Description Apply Cancel Enter a description for this scheduler rule. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 200 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 18 Certificates 18.1 Overview The Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owners identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication. 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the Device's CA-signed certificates (Section 18.4 on page 205). The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the Device (Section 18.4 on page 205). 18.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Certification Authority A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the Device to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 201 Chapter 18 Certificates 18.3 The Local Certificates Screen Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. This is the Devices summary list of certificates and certification requests. Figure 112 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 85 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates LABEL Private Key is protected by a password?

Browse... Import Certificate Click this button to save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification DESCRIPTION Select the check box and enter the private key into the text box to store it on the Device. The private key should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces). Click this to find the certificate file you want to upload. Create Certificate Request Current File Subject Issuer Valid From Valid To Modify/Delete authority from your computer to the Device. Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the Device generate a certification request. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN

(Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate (or certification request). For a certification request, click Load Signed to import the signed certificate. Click the Remove icon to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use. 202 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 18.3.1 Create Certificate Request Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Create Certificate Request to open the following screen. Use this screen to have the Device generate a certification request. Figure 113 Create Certificate Request Chapter 18 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 86 Create Certificate Request LABEL Certificate Name Common Name Select Auto to have the Device configure this field automatically. Or select Customize to DESCRIPTION Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate. enter it manually. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 63 ASCII characters. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string. Type up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Device drops trailing spaces. Type up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Device drops trailing spaces. Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Organization Name State/Province Name Country/Region Name Apply Cancel After you click Apply, the following screen displays to notify you that you need to get the certificate request signed by a Certificate Authority. If you already have, click Load_Signed to import the signed certificate into the Device. Otherwise click Back to return to the Local Certificates screen. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 203 Chapter 18 Certificates Figure 114 Certificate Request Created 18.3.2 Load Signed Certificate After you create a certificate request and have it signed by a Certificate Authority, in the Local Certificates screen click the certificate requests Load Signed icon to import the signed certificate into the Device. 204 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import it. Figure 115 Load Signed Certificate Chapter 18 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION This is the name of the signed certificate. Table 87 Load Signed Certificate LABEL Certificate Name Certificate Apply Cancel Copy and paste the signed certificate into the text box to store it on the Device. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 18.4 The Trusted CA Screen Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the following screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the Device to accept as trusted. The Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 205 Chapter 18 Certificates being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities. Figure 116 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 88 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA LABEL Import Certificate

Name Subject DESCRIPTION Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the Device. This is the index number of the entry. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate (or certification request). Type Modify/Delete Click the Remove button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use. 18.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate Click the View icon in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authoritys certificate. Figure 117 Trusted CA: View 206 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 18 Certificates The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 89 Trusted CA: View LABEL Name DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. The read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Click Back to return to the previous screen. Back 18.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. The Device trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates. Figure 118 Trusted CA: Import Certificate The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 90 Trusted CA: Import Certificate LABEL Certificate File Path Enable Trusted CA for 802.1x Authentication Certificate OK Cancel DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. If you select this check box, the trusted CA will be used for 802.1x authentication. The selected trusted CA will be displayed in the Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x:

Edit screen. Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the Device. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 207 Chapter 18 Certificates 208 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 19 VPN 19.1 Overview A virtual private network (VPN) provides secure communications over the the Internet. Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) is a standards-based VPN that provides confidentiality, data integrity, and authentication. This chapter shows you how to configure the Devices VPN settings. 19.2 IPSec VPN 19.2.1 The General Screen Use this screen to view and manage your VPN tunnel policies. The following figure helps explain the main fields in the web configurator. Figure 119 IPSec Fields Summary Local Network Remote Network VPN Tunnel Click Security > VPN to open this screen as shown next. Figure 120 IPSec VPN VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 209 Chapter 19 VPN This screen contains the following fields:

DESCRIPTION Table 91 IPSec VPN LABEL Add new connection Click this button to add an item to the list. This displays if the VPN policy is enabled. Enable The name of the VPN connection. Connection Name This is the IP address of the remote IPSec router in the IKE SA. Remote Gateway Local Addresses This displays the IP address(es) on the LAN behind your Device. This displays the IP address(es) on the LAN behind the remote IPSecs router. Remote Addresses Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Delete 19.2.2 IPSec VPN: Add Use these settings to add or edit VPN policies. Click Security > VPN > Add new connection to open this screen as shown next. 210 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Figure 121 IPSec VPN: Add Chapter 19 VPN VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 211 Chapter 19 VPN This screen contains the following fields:

Table 92 IPSec VPN: Add LABEL IPSec Setup DESCRIPTION IPSec Connection Name Tunnel Mode Remote IPSec Gateway Address Local Local Address Type IP Address for VPN IP Subnetmask Remote Enter the name of the VPN connection. Select which protocol you want to use in the IPSec SA. Choices are:

AH (RFC 2402) - provides integrity, authentication, sequence integrity (replay resistance), and non-repudiation but not encryption. If you select AH, you must select an Authentication algorithm. ESP (RFC 2406) - provides encryption and the same services offered by AH, but its authentication is weaker. If you select ESP, you must select an Encryption algorithm and Authentication algorithm. Both AH and ESP increase processing requirements and latency (delay). The Device and remote IPSec router must use the same active protocol. Enter the IP address of the remote IPSec router in the IKE SA. Select Single to have only one local LAN IP address use the VPN tunnel. Select Subnet to specify local LAN IP addresses by their subnet mask. If Single is selected, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your Device. If Subnet is selected, specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask by entering a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your Device. Then enter the subnet mask to identify the network address. If Subnet is selected, enter the subnet mask to identify the network address. Remote Address Type IP Address for VPN Select Single to have only one remote LAN IP address use the VPN tunnel. Select Subnet to specify remote LAN IP addresses by their subnet mask. If Single is selected, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind the remote IPSecs router. If Subnet is selected, specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask by entering a (static) IP address on the LAN behind the remote IPSecs router. Then enter the subnet mask to identify the network address. If Subnet is selected, enter the subnet mask to identify the network address. IP Subnetmask Security Protocol - Auto Key Exchange Method Select the key exchange method:

Auto(IKE) - Select this to use automatic IKE key management VPN connection policy. Manual - Select this option to configure a VPN connection policy that uses a manual key instead of IKE key management. This may be useful if you have problems with IKE key management. Note: Only use manual key as a temporary solution, because it is not as secure as a regular IPSec SA. Authentication Method Select Pre-Shared Key to use a pre-shared key for authentication, and type in your pre-shared key. A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. It is called "pre-shared" because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection. Select Certificate to use a certificate for authentication. 212 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 19 VPN Table 92 IPSec VPN: Add LABEL Pre-Shared Key Certificates Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) DESCRIPTION Type your pre-shared key in this field. A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. Type from 8 to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal ("0-9",

"A-F") characters. You must precede a hexadecimal key with a "0x (zero x), which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the key. For example, in

"0x0123456789ABCDEF", 0x denotes that the key is hexadecimal and 0123456789ABCDEF is the key itself. If you use a certificate for authentication, select the certificates to use from the lists. You can import certificates in the Security > Certificates screens. Select whether or not you want to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) PFS changes the root key that is used to generate encryption keys for each IPSec SA. The longer the key, the more secure the encryption, but also the longer it takes to encrypt and decrypt information. Both routers must use the same DH key group. Choices are:

Diffie-Hellman Group2 - use a 1024-bit random number Diffie-Hellman Group5 - use a 1536-bit random number Diffie-Hellman Group14 - use a 2048-bit random number Click this to display advanced settings. Show Advanced Settings Advanced Setting - Phase 1 Mode Select the negotiation mode to use to negotiate the IKE SA. Choices are:

Encryption Algorithm Main - this encrypts the Devices and remote IPSec routers identities but takes more time to establish the IKE SA. Aggressive - this is faster but does not encrypt the identities. The Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same negotiation mode. Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are:

DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm AES128 - a 128-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES196 - a 196-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES256 - a 256-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm Integrity Algorithm Diffie-Hellman Group for Key Exchange Key Life Time The Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same key size and encryption algorithm. Longer keys require more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data. Choices are MD5, SHA1, SHA2-256 and SHA2-512. SHA is generally considered stronger than MD5, but it is also slower. Select which Diffie-Hellman key group you want to use for encryption keys. Choices for number of bits in the random number are: 768, 1024, 2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192. The longer the key, the more secure the encryption, but also the longer it takes to encrypt and decrypt information. Both routers must use the same DH key group. Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field. A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 213 Chapter 19 VPN Table 92 IPSec VPN: Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Phase 2 Encryption Algorithm Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are:

DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm AES128 - a 128-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES196 - a 196-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES256 - a 256-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm NULL - no encryption key or algorithm Integrity Algorithm Diffie-Hellman Group for Key Exchange Key Life Time DPD Active The Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same key size and encryption algorithm. Longer keys require more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data. Choices are MD5, SHA1. SHA is generally considered stronger than MD5, but it is also slower. Select which Diffie-Hellman key group you want to use for encryption keys. Choices for number of bits in the random number are: 768, 1024, 2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192. Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field. A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected. Enable Dead Peer Detection (DPD) Active check box if you want the Device to make sure the remote IPSec router is there before it transmits data through the IKE SA. The remote IPSec router must support DPD. If the remote IPSec router does not respond, the Device shuts down the IKE SA. Security Protocol - Manual Key Exchange Method Encryption Algorithm Select the key exchange method:

Auto(IKE) - Select this to use automatic IKE key management VPN connection policy. Manual - Select this option to configure a VPN connection policy that uses a manual key instead of IKE key management. This may be useful if you have problems with IKE key management. Note: Only use manual key as a temporary solution, because it is not as secure as a regular IPSec SA. Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are:

DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm Encryption Key AES - AES encryption algorithm This field is applicable when you select an Encryption Algorithm. Enter the encryption key, which depends on the encryption algorithm. DES - type a unique key 16 hexadecimal characters long 3DES - type a unique key 48 hexadecimal characters long Authentication Algorithm AES - type a unique key 32, 48 or 64 hexadecimal characters long Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data. Choices are MD5, SHA1. SHA is generally considered stronger than MD5, but it is also slower. 214 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 19 VPN Table 92 IPSec VPN: Add LABEL Authentication Key SPI Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Enter the authentication key, which depends on the authentication algorithm. MD5 - type a unique key 32 hexadecimal characters long SHA1 - type a unique key 40 hexadecimal characters long Type a unique SPI (Security Parameter Index) in hexadecimal characters. The SPI is used to identify the Device during authentication. The Device and remote IPSec router must use the same SPI. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 19.3 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this section. 19.3.1 IPSec Architecture The overall IPSec architecture is shown as follows. Figure 122 IPSec Architecture IPSec Algorithms The ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) Protocol (RFC 2406) and AH (Authentication Header) protocol (RFC 2402) describe the packet formats and the default standards for packet structure

(including implementation algorithms). VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 215 Chapter 19 VPN The Encryption Algorithm describes the use of encryption techniques such as DES (Data Encryption Standard) and Triple DES algorithms. The Authentication Algorithms, HMAC-MD5 (RFC 2403) and HMAC-SHA-1 (RFC 2404, provide an authentication mechanism for the AH and ESP protocols. Key Management Key management allows you to determine whether to use IKE (ISAKMP) or manual key configuration in order to set up a VPN. 19.3.2 Encapsulation The two modes of operation for IPSec VPNs are Transport mode and Tunnel mode. At the time of writing, the Device supports Tunnel mode only. Figure 123 Transport and Tunnel Mode IPSec Encapsulation Transport Mode Transport mode is used to protect upper layer protocols and only affects the data in the IP packet. In Transport mode, the IP packet contains the security protocol (AH or ESP) located after the original IP header and options, but before any upper layer protocols contained in the packet (such as TCP and UDP). With ESP, protection is applied only to the upper layer protocols contained in the packet. The IP header information and options are not used in the authentication process. Therefore, the originating IP address cannot be verified for integrity against the data. With the use of AH as the security protocol, protection is extended forward into the IP header to verify the integrity of the entire packet by use of portions of the original IP header in the hashing process. Tunnel Mode Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet to transmit it securely. A Tunnel mode is required for gateway services to provide access to internal systems. Tunnel mode is fundamentally an IP tunnel with authentication and encryption. This is the most common mode of operation. Tunnel mode is required for gateway to gateway and host to gateway communications. Tunnel mode communications have two sets of IP headers:

Outside header: The outside IP header contains the destination IP address of the VPN gateway. 216 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Inside header: The inside IP header contains the destination IP address of the final system behind the VPN gateway. The security protocol appears after the outer IP header and before the inside IP header. Chapter 19 VPN 19.3.3 IKE Phases There are two phases to every IKE (Internet Key Exchange) negotiation phase 1 (Authentication) and phase 2 (Key Exchange). A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA and the second one uses that SA to negotiate SAs for IPSec. Figure 124 Two Phases to Set Up the IPSec SA In phase 1 you must:

Choose a negotiation mode. Authenticate the connection by entering a pre-shared key. Choose an encryption algorithm. Choose an authentication algorithm. Choose a Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography key group. Set the IKE SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long an IKE SA should stay up before it times out. An IKE SA times out when the IKE SA lifetime period expires. If an IKE SA times out when an IPSec SA is already established, the IPSec SA stays connected. In phase 2 you must:

Choose an encryption algorithm. Choose an authentication algorithm Choose a Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography key group. Set the IPSec SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long the IPSec SA should stay up before it times out. The Device automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if there is traffic when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires. If an IPSec SA times out, then the IPSec router must renegotiate the SA the next time someone attempts to send traffic. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 217 Chapter 19 VPN 19.3.4 Negotiation Mode The phase 1 Negotiation Mode you select determines how the Security Association (SA) will be established for each connection through IKE negotiations. Main Mode ensures the highest level of security when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1). It uses 6 messages in three round trips: SA negotiation, Diffie-Hellman exchange and an exchange of nonces (a nonce is a random number). This mode features identity protection (your identity is not revealed in the negotiation). Aggressive Mode is quicker than Main Mode because it eliminates several steps when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1). However the trade-off is that faster speed limits its negotiating power and it also does not provide identity protection. It is useful in remote access situations where the address of the initiator is not know by the responder and both parties want to use pre-shared key authentication. 19.3.5 IPSec and NAT Read this section if you are running IPSec on a host computer behind the Device. NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both Transport and Tunnel mode. An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data payload and headers, with a hash value appended to the packet. When using AH protocol, packet contents (the data payload) are not encrypted. A NAT device in between the IPSec endpoints will rewrite either the source or destination address with one of its own choosing. The VPN device at the receiving end will verify the integrity of the incoming packet by computing its own hash value, and complain that the hash value appended to the received packet doesn't match. The VPN device at the receiving end doesn't know about the NAT in the middle, so it assumes that the data has been maliciously altered. IPSec using ESP in Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire original packet (including headers) in a new IP packet. The new IP packet's source address is the outbound address of the sending VPN gateway, and its destination address is the inbound address of the VPN device at the receiving end. When using ESP protocol with authentication, the packet contents (in this case, the entire original packet) are encrypted. The encrypted contents, but not the new headers, are signed with a hash value appended to the packet. Tunnel mode ESP with authentication is compatible with NAT because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the "original header plus original payload," which is unchanged by a NAT device. Transport mode ESP with authentication is not compatible with NAT. Table 93 VPN and NAT SECURITY PROTOCOL AH AH ESP ESP MODE Transport Tunnel Transport Tunnel NAT N N N Y 218 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 19 VPN 19.3.6 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both transport and tunnel mode. An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data payload and headers, with a hash value appended to the packet, but a NAT device between the IPSec endpoints rewrites the source or destination address. As a result, the VPN device at the receiving end finds a mismatch between the hash value and the data and assumes that the data has been maliciously altered. NAT is not normally compatible with ESP in transport mode either, but the Devices NAT Traversal feature provides a way to handle this. NAT traversal allows you to set up an IKE SA when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers. Figure 125 NAT Router Between IPSec Routers A B Normally you cannot set up an IKE SA with a NAT router between the two IPSec routers because the NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet. NAT traversal solves the problem by adding a UDP port 500 header to the IPSec packet. The NAT router forwards the IPSec packet with the UDP port 500 header unchanged. In the above figure, when IPSec router A tries to establish an IKE SA, IPSec router B checks the UDP port 500 header, and IPSec routers A and B build the IKE SA. For NAT traversal to work, you must:

Use ESP security protocol (in either transport or tunnel mode). Use IKE keying mode. Enable NAT traversal on both IPSec endpoints. Set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to IPSec router A. Finally, NAT is compatible with ESP in tunnel mode because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the "original header plus original payload," which is unchanged by a NAT device. The compatibility of AH and ESP with NAT in tunnel and transport modes is summarized in the following table. Table 94 VPN and NAT SECURITY PROTOCOL AH AH ESP ESP MODE Transport Tunnel Transport Tunnel NAT N N Y*

Y Y* - This is supported in the Device if you enable NAT traversal. 19.3.7 Pre-Shared Key A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation (see Section 19.3.3 on page 217 for more on IKE phases). It is called pre-shared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 219 Chapter 19 VPN 19.3.8 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups Diffie-Hellman (DH) is a public-key cryptography protocol that allows two parties to establish a shared secret over an unsecured communications channel. Diffie-Hellman is used within IKE SA setup to establish session keys. Upon completion of the Diffie-Hellman exchange, the two peers have a shared secret, but the IKE SA is not authenticated. For authentication, use pre-shared keys. 220 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 20 Log 20.1 Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the Device log and then display the logs or have the Device send them to an administrator (as e-mail) or to a syslog server. 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the System Log screen to see the system logs (Section 20.2 on page 222). Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select

(Section 20.3 on page 223). 20.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks

(access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black. Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server. Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels. Table 95 Syslog Severity Levels CODE 0 1 2 3 4 SEVERITY Emergency: The system is unusable. Alert: Action must be taken immediately. Critical: The system condition is critical. Error: There is an error condition on the system. Warning: There is a warning condition on the system. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 221 Chapter 20 Log Table 95 Syslog Severity Levels CODE 5 6 7 SEVERITY Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system. Informational: The syslog contains an informational message. Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes. 20.2 The System Log Screen Use the System Log screen to see the system logs. Click System Monitor > Log to open the System Log screen. Figure 126 System Monitor > Log > System Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 96 System Monitor > Log > System Log LABEL Level DESCRIPTION Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Select the type of logs to display. Click this to delete all the logs. Click this to renew the log screen. Click this to export the selected log(s). Category Clear Log Refresh Export Log Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance >

Logs Setting screen. System Log

Time Facility Level Messages This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details. This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server. This field states the reason for the log. 222 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 20.3 The Security Log Screen Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select. Click System Monitor > Log > Security Log to open the following screen. Figure 127 System Monitor > Log > Security Log Chapter 20 Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 97 System Monitor > Log > Security Log LABEL Level DESCRIPTION Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Select the type of logs to display. Click this to delete all the logs. Click this to renew the log screen. Click this to export the selected log(s). Category Clear Log Refresh Export Log Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance >

Time Facility Level Messages Logs Setting screen. This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details. This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server. This field states the reason for the log. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 223 Chapter 20 Log 224 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 21 Traffic Status 21.1 Overview Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN and LAN interfaces. 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 21.2 on page 225). Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 21.3 on page 227). 21.2 The WAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. The figure in this screen shows the number of bytes received and sent on the Device. Figure 128 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 225 Chapter 21 Traffic Status The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 98 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN LABEL Connected Interface Packets Sent DESCRIPTION This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected. Data Error Drop This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Packets Received Data Error Drop more...hide more Disabled Interface Packets Sent This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. Click more... to show more information. Click hide more to hide them. This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disconnected. Data Error Drop This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Packets Received Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 226 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 21 Traffic Status 21.3 The LAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen. The figure in this screen shows the interface that is currently connected on the Device. Figure 129 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 99 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN LABEL Refresh Interval Interface Bytes Sent Bytes Received more...hide more Interface Sent (Packets) DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the Device to update this screen. This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface. Click more... to show more information. Click hide more to hide them. This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. Data Error Drop This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Received (Packets) Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 227 Chapter 21 Traffic Status 21.4 The NAT Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT to open the following screen. The figure in this screen shows the NAT statistics for hosts that are currently connected on the Device. Figure 130 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 100 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT LABEL Refresh Interval Device Name IP Address MAC Address No. of Open Session DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the Device to update this screen. This displays the name of the connected host. This displays the IP address of the connected host. This displays the MAC address of the connected host. This displays the number of open NAT sessions for the connected host. 228 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 22 ARP Table 22.1 Overview Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area network. An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address. 22.1.1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device, the device's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device. If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN. The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the device puts all ones in the target MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied. 22.2 ARP Table Screen Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s). To open this screen, click System Monitor > ARP Table. Figure 131 System Monitor > ARP Table The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 101 System Monitor > ARP Table LABEL

IP Address DESCRIPTION This is the ARP table entry number. This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a port. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 229 Chapter 22 ARP Table Table 101 System Monitor > ARP Table (continued) LABEL MAC Address Device DESCRIPTION This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address. This is the type of interface used by the device. You can click on the device type to go to its configuration screen. 230 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 23 Routing Table 23.1 Overview Routing is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest path to forward a packet. 23.2 The Routing Table Screen Click System Monitor > Routing Table to open the following screen. Figure 132 System Monitor > Routing Table The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 102 System Monitor > Routing Table LABEL Destination Gateway Subnet Mask Flag DESCRIPTION This indicates the destination IP address of this route. This indicates the IP address of the gateway that helps forward this routes traffic. This indicates the destination subnet mask of this route. This indicates the route status. U-Up: The route is up.

!-Reject: The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail. G-Gateway: The route uses a gateway to forward traffic. H-Host: The target of the route is a host. R-Reinstate: The route is reinstated for dynamic routing. Metric D-Dynamic (redirect): The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon or redirect. M-Modified (redirect): The route is modified from a routing daemon or redirect. The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". The smaller the number, the lower the "cost". VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 231 Chapter 23 Routing Table Table 102 System Monitor > Routing Table (continued) LABEL Service Interface DESCRIPTION This indicates the name of the service used to forward the route. This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is forwarded. br0 indicates the LAN interface. ptm0 indicates the WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode. ppp0 indicates the WAN interface using PPPoE. 232 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 24 IGMP Status 24.1 Overview Use the IGMP Status screens to look at IGMP group status and traffic statistics. 24.2 The IGMP Group Status Screen Use this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the Device has joined and which ports have joined it. To open this screen, click System Monitor > IGMP Group Status. Figure 133 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 103 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status LABEL Interface DESCRIPTION This field displays the name of an interface on the Device that belongs to an IGMP multicast group. Multicast Group This field displays the name of the IGMP multicast group to which the interface belongs. Filter Mode INCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the multicast groups traffic. Source List EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic but other IP addresses can. This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic depending on the filter mode. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 233 Chapter 24 IGMP Status 234 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 25 xDSL Statistics 25.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen Use this screen to view detailed DSL statistics. Click System Monitor > xDSL Statistics to open the following screen. Figure 134 System Monitor > xDSL Statistics VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 235 Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 104 Status > xDSL Statistics LABEL Refresh Interval Line xDSL Training Status Mode Traffic Type DESCRIPTION Select the time interval for refreshing statistics. Select which DSL lines statistics you want to display. This displays the current state of setting up the DSL connection. This displays the ITU standard used for this connection. This displays the type of traffic the DSL port is sending and receiving. Inactive displays if the DSL port is not currently sending or receiving traffic. This displays how long the port has been running (or connected) since the last time it was started. These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider. Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service Link Uptime xDSL Port Details Upstream Line Rate Actual Net Data Rate Trellis Coding SNR Margin Actual Delay Transmit Power Receive Power Actual INP provider. These are the data transfer rates at which the port is sending and receiving data. These are the rates at which the port is sending and receiving the payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic. This displays whether or not the port is using Trellis coding for traffic it is sending and receiving. Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions. Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable. This is the upstream and downstream Signal-to-Noise Ratio margin (in dB). A DMT sub-

carriers SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power. The signal-to-noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could increase with the system still being able to meet its transmission targets. This is the upstream and downstream interleave delay. It is the wait (in milliseconds) that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved (assembled) and then transmitted. Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction (Reed- Solomon) is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line. The bigger the delay, the bigger the data block size, allowing better error correction to be performed. This is the upstream and downstream far end actual aggregate transmit power (in dBm). Upstream is how much power the port is using to transmit to the service provider. Downstream is how much port the service provider is using to transmit to the port. Upstream is how much power the service provider is receiving from the port. Downstream is how much power the port is receiving from the service provider. Sudden spikes in the lines level of external noise (impulse noise) can cause errors and result in lost packets. This could especially impact the quality of multimedia traffic such as voice or video. Impulse noise protection (INP) provides a buffer to allow for correction of errors caused by error correction to deal with this. The number of DMT (Discrete Multi-

Tone) symbols shows the level of impulse noise protection for the upstream and downstream traffic. A higher symbol value provides higher error correction capability, but it causes overhead and higher delay which may increase error rates in received multimedia data. Total Attenuation This is the upstream and downstream line attenuation, measured in decibels (dB). This attenuation is the difference between the power transmitted at the near-end and the power received at the far-end. Attenuation is affected by the channel characteristics (wire gauge, quality, condition and length of the physical line). These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates at which the port could send and receive payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic. Attainable Net Data Rate xDSL Counters 236 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics Table 104 Status > xDSL Statistics (continued) LABEL Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service DESCRIPTION Upstream FEC CRC ES SES UAS LOS LOF LOM provider. These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider. This is the number of Far End Corrected blocks. This is the number of Cyclic Redundancy Checks. This is the number of Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing at least one errored block or at least one defect. This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing 30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of ES. This is the number of UnAvailable Seconds. This is the number of Loss Of Signal seconds. This is the number of Loss Of Frame seconds. This is the number of Loss of Margin seconds. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 237 Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics 238 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 26 3G Statistics 26.1 Overview Use the 3G Statistics screens to look at 3G Internet connection status. 26.2 The 3G Statistics Screen To open this screen, click System Monitor > 3G Statistics. Figure 135 System Monitor > 3G Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 105 System Monitor > 3G Statistics LABEL Refresh Interval 3G Status DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the Device to update this screen. Select No Refresh to stop refreshing. This field displays the status of the 3G Internet connection. This field can display:

GSM - Global System for Mobile Communications, 2G GPRS - General Packet Radio Service, 2.5G EDGE - Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution, 2.75G WCDMA - Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, 3G HSDPA - High-Speed Downlink Packet Access, 3.5G HSUPA - High-Speed Uplink Packet Access, 3.75G HSPA - HSDPA+HSUPA, 3.75G This field displays the name of the service provider. Service Provider Signal Strength This field displays the strength of the signal in dBm. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 239 Chapter 26 3G Statistics DESCRIPTION This field displays the time the connection has been up. Table 105 System Monitor > 3G Statistics (continued) LABEL Connection Uptime 3G Card Manufacturer 3G Card Model 3G Card F/W Version SIM Card IMSI This field displays the model name of the 3G card. This field displays the firmware version of the 3G card. This field displays the manufacturer of the 3G card. The International Mobile Subscriber Identity or IMSI is a unique identification number associated with all cellular networks. This number is provisioned in the SIM card. 240 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 27 User Account 27.1 Overview In the Users Account screen, you can change the password of the user account that you used to log in the Device. 27.2 The User Account Screen Click Maintenance > User Account to open the following screen. Figure 136 Maintenance > User Account The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 106 Maintenance > User Account LABEL User Name Old Password DESCRIPTION This field displays the name of the account that you used to log in the system. Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. Type your new system password (up to 256 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use the new password to access the Device. Type the new password again for confirmation. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. New Password Retype to confirm Apply Cancel VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 241 Chapter 27 User Account 242 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 28 Remote Management 28.1 Overview Remote Management allows you to manage your Device from a remote location through the following interfaces:

LAN WAN Trust Domain Note: The Device is managed using the Web Configurator. 28.2 The Remote MGMT Screen Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) users can use which service(s) to manage the Device. Click Maintenance > Remote MGMT to open the following screen. Figure 137 Maintenance > Remote MGMT VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 243 Chapter 28 Remote Management The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 107 Maintenance > Remote MGMT LABEL Trust Domain Status IP Address Services LAN/WLAN This field displays whether the Trust Domain is active or not. Enter the Trust Domain IP address. This is the service you may use to access the Device. Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the LAN/WLAN. Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the WAN. Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the Trust Domain. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the Device) uses to authenticate itself to the HTTPS client. You must have certificates already configured in the Certificates screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. WAN Trust Domain Port Certificate HTTPS Certificate Apply Cancel 244 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 29 TR-069 Client 29.1 Overview This chapter explains how to configure the Devices TR-069 auto-configuration settings. 29.2 The TR-069 Client Screen TR-069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), for example your Device, can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). TR-069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs) between an ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup Language (XML) format over HTTP or HTTPS. An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the Device, modify settings, perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the Device. You have to enable the device to be managed by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password. Click Maintenance > TR-069 Client to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure your Device to be managed by an ACS. Figure 138 Maintenance > TR-069 Client VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 245 Chapter 29 TR-069 Client The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 108 Maintenance > TR-069 Client LABEL Inform Inform Interval DESCRIPTION Select Enable for the Device to send periodic inform via TR-069 on the WAN. Otherwise, select Disable. Enter the time interval (in seconds) at which the Device sends information to the auto-

configuration server. Enter the URL or IP address of the auto-configuration server. If you select Any_WAN, you should also select the pre-configured WAN connection(s). ACS URL ACS User Name Enter the TR-069 user name for authentication with the auto-configuration server. Enter the TR-069 password for authentication with the auto-configuration server. ACS Password WAN Interface Select a WAN interface through which the TR-069 traffic passes. used by TR-069 client Display SOAP messages on serial console Connection Request Authentication Connection Request User Name Select Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console. Enter the connection request user name. When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device, this user name is used to authenticate the ACS. Enter the connection request password. Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request from the ACS. Connection Request Password Connection Request URL Local certificate used by TR-069 client Apply Cancel When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device, this password is used to authenticate the ACS. This shows the connection request URL. The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the Device. You can choose a local certificate used by TR-069 client. The local certificate should be imported in the Security > Certificates > Local Certificates screen. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 246 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 30 TR-064 30.1 Overview This chapter explains how to configure the Devices TR-064 auto-configuration settings. 30.2 The TR-064 Screen TR-064 is a LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum. TR-064 is built on top of UPnP. It allows the users to use a TR-064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user-specific parameters, such as the username and password. Click Maintenance > TR-064 to open the following screen. Figure 139 Maintenance > TR-064 The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 109 Maintenance > TR-064 LABEL State Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate management via TR-064 on the LAN. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 247 Chapter 30 TR-064 248 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 31 Time Settings 31.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval. 31.2 The Time Screen To change your Devices time and date, click Maintenance > Time. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the Devices time based on your local time zone. Figure 140 Maintenance > Time Setting VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 249 Chapter 31 Time Settings The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 110 Maintenance > Time Setting LABEL Current Date/Time Current Time DESCRIPTION This field displays the time of your Device. Current Date Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the time with the time server. This field displays the date of your Device. Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the date with the time server. NTP Time Server First ~ Fifth NTP time server Time Zone Time zone offset Daylight Saving State Start rule:

End rule Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box. Otherwise, select Other and enter the IP address or URL (up to 29 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Select None if you dont want to configure the time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select Enable if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States, set the day to Second, Sunday, the month to March and the time to 2 in the Hour field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment

(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday and the month to March. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would set the day to First, Sunday, the month to November and the time to 2 in the Hour field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment

(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday, and the month to October. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). 250 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 31 Time Settings Table 110 Maintenance > Time Setting (continued) LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 251 Chapter 31 Time Settings 252 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 32 E-mail Notification 32.1 Overview A mail server is an application or a computer that runs such an application to receive, forward and deliver e-mail messages. To have the Device send reports, logs or notifications via e-mail, you must specify an e-mail server and the e-mail addresses of the sender and receiver. 32.2 The Email Notification Screen Click Maintenance > Email Notification to open the Email Notification screen. Use this screen to view, remove and add mail server information on the Device. Figure 141 Maintenance > Email Notification The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this button to create a new entry. This field displays the server name or the IP address of the mail server. Table 111 Maintenance > Email Notification LABEL Add New Email Mail Server Address Username Password Email Address This field displays the user name of the senders mail account. This field displays the password of the senders mail account. This field displays the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-

mail that the Device sends. Click this button to delete the selected entries. Delete VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 253 Chapter 32 E-mail Notification 32.2.1 Email Notification Edit Click the Add button in the Email Notification screen. Use this screen to configure the required information for sending e-mail via a mail server. Figure 142 Email Notification > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 112 Email Notification > Add LABEL Mail Server Address DESCRIPTION Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail address specified in the Account Email Address field. Authentication Username Authentication Password Account Email Address Apply Cancel If this field is left blank, reports, logs or notifications will not be sent via e-mail. Enter the user name (up to 32 characters). This is usually the user name of a mail account you specified in the Account Email Address field. Enter the password associated with the user name above. Enter the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-mail notification that the Device sends. If you activate SSL/TLS authentication, the e-mail address must be able to be authenticated by the mail server as well. Click this button to save your changes and return to the previous screen. Click this button to begin configuring this screen afresh. 254 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 33 Logs Setting 33.1 Overview You can configure where the Device sends logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the Device records in the Logs Setting screen. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 255 Chapter 33 Logs Setting 33.2 The Log Settings Screen To change your Devices log settings, click Maintenance > Logs Setting. The screen appears as shown. Figure 143 Maintenance > Logs Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 113 Maintenance > Logs Setting LABEL Syslog Setting Syslog Logging Mode The Device sends a log to an external syslog server. Select Enable to enable syslog logging. Select the syslog destination from the drop-down list box. If you select Remote, the log(s) will be sent to a remote syslog server. If you select Local File, the log(s) will be saved in a local file. If you want to send the log(s) to a remote syslog server and save it in a local file, select Local File and Remote. 256 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 33 Logs Setting Table 113 Maintenance > Logs Setting (continued) LABEL Syslog Server DESCRIPTION Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs. Enter the port number used by the syslog server. UDP Port E-mail Log Settings Mail Server System Log Mail Subject Security Log Mail Subject Send Log to Send Alarm to Alarm Interval Allowed Capacity Before Email Clear log after sending mail Active Log and Alert System Log Security Log Send immediate alert Apply Cancel Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail. Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log e-mail message that the Device sends. Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log e-mail message that the Device sends. The Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, the Device does not send logs via E-mail. Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack, system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E-mail address where the alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail. Specify how often the alarm should be updated. Set what percent of the Devices log storage space can be filled before the Device sends a log e-mail. Select this to delete all the logs after the Device sends an E-mail of the logs. Select the categories of system logs that you want to record. Select the categories of security logs that you want to record. Select log categories for which you want the Device to send E-mail alerts immediately. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 33.2.1 Example E-mail Log An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The following is an example of a log sent by e-mail. You may edit the subject title. The date format here is Day-Month-Year. The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-Second. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 257 Chapter 33 Logs Setting

"End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent. Figure 144 E-mail Log Example Subject:

Firewall Alert From Date:

Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42 From:

user@zyxel.com To:

user@zyxel.com 1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward

| 09:54:19 |UDP src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01> |

..{snip}.. .{snip}.. 126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:00 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:30 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

End of Firewall Log 258 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 34 Firmware Upgrade 34.1 Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your Device. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your devices performance. Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Device. 34.2 The Firmware Screen Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. Do NOT turn off the Device while firmware upload is in progress!

Figure 145 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION This is the present Firmware version and the date created. Table 114 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL Current Firmware Version File Path Browse... Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. Upload VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 259 Chapter 34 Firmware Upgrade After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the Device again. Figure 146 Firmware Uploading The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 147 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen. Figure 148 Error Message 260 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 35 Configuration 35.1 Overview The Configuration screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default. 35.2 The Configuration Screen Click Maintenance > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next. Figure 149 Maintenance > Configuration Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the Devices current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Backup to save the Devices current configuration to your computer. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 261 Chapter 35 Configuration Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your Device. Table 115 Restore Configuration LABEL File Path Browse... Upload DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. Click this to begin the upload process. Do not turn off the Device while configuration file upload is in progress. After the Device configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again to restart the Device. The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 150 Network Temporarily Disconnected If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Configuration screen. Figure 151 Configuration Upload Error 262 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 35 Configuration Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the Device to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears. Figure 152 Reset Warning Message Figure 153 Reset In Process Message You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your Device. Refer to Section 1.6 on page 20 for more information on the RESET button. 35.3 The Reboot Screen System restart allows you to reboot the Device remotely without turning the power off. You may need to do this if the Device hangs, for example. Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click Reboot to have the Device reboot. This does not affect the Device's configuration. Figure 154 Maintenance > Reboot VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 263 Chapter 35 Configuration 264 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 36 Diagnostic 36.1 Overview The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the Device. The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by independent organizations. A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts subscribers network access. In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts, IEEE 802.1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) specification which allows network administrators to identify and manage connection faults. Through discovery and verification of the path, CFM can detect, analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs. 36.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route packets take to a host (Section 36.3 on page 266). The 802.1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions (Section 36.5 on page 268). The OAM Ping screen lets you send an ATM OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC. (Section 36.5 on page 268). 36.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. How CFM Works A Maintenance Association (MA) defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point (MEP) ports on the device under a Maintenance Domain (MD) level. An MEP port has the ability to send Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices CCMs within an MA. CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults. Loopback test - checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response (LBR) from its target after it sends the Loop Back Message (LBM). If no response is received, there might be a connectivity fault between them. Link trace test - provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where the fault is. If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP, this may indicate a fault. Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to the line connectivity status report. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 265 Chapter 36 Diagnostic 36.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup Use this screen to ping, traceroute, or nslookup an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic >

Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup to open the screen shown next. Figure 155 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 116 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup LABEL URL or IP Address Ping TraceRoute DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping, traceroute, or nslookup in order to test a connection. Click this to ping the IP address that you entered. Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the path a packet takes to the specified computer. Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you enter. Nslookup 266 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 36.4 802.1ag Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > 8.2.1ag to open the following screen. Use this screen to perform CFM actions. Figure 156 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag Chapter 36 Diagnostic The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select a level (0-7) under which you want to create an MA. Enter the target devices MAC address to which the Device performs a CFM loopback test. Table 117 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag LABEL 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management Maintenance Domain (MD) Level Destination MAC Address 802.1Q VLAN ID VDSL Traffic Type Loopback Message (LBM) Linktrace Message (LTM) Set MD Level Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM (Loop Back Message) to a specified This shows how many Loop Back Messages (LBMs) are sent and if there is any inorder or outorder Loop Back Response (LBR) received from a remote MEP. This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response (LTR). Click this button to configure the MD (Maintenance Domain) level. This shows whether the VDSL traffic is activated. Type a VLAN ID (0-4095) for this MA. remote end point. Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs (Link Trace Messages) to a specified remote end point. Send Linktrace VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 267 Chapter 36 Diagnostic 36.5 OAM Ping Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping to open the screen shown next. Use this screen to perform an OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) F4 or F5 loopback test on a PVC. The Device sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then returns it to the Device. The test result then displays in the text box. ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The terminology for virtual circuits is as follows:

Virtual Channel (VC) Virtual Path (VP) Virtual Circuits Logical connections between ATM devices A bundle of virtual channels A series of virtual paths between circuit end points Figure 157 Virtual Circuit Topology Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points. In an ATM cell header, a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) identifies a link formed by a virtual path; a VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) identifies a channel within a virtual path. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit. F4 cells operate at the virtual path (VP) level, while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel (VC) level. F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections, but use different predefined VCI values. F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC connections, and are distinguished from data cells by a predefined Payload Type Identifier (PTI) in the cell header. Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types. segment F4 flows (VCI=3) end-to-end F4 flows (VCI=4) segment F5 flows (PTI=100) end-to-end F5 flows (PTI=101) OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availability between two DSL devices. Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point which terminates a VP or VC segment. End-to-end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection, where an ATM link is terminated. Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest neighboring ATM device. End-to-end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end-to-end PVC. Note: The DSLAM to which the Device is connected must also support ATM F4 and/or F5 to use this test. 268 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Note: This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer-2 interface. Figure 158 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Chapter 36 Diagnostic The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 118 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test. Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test. Press this to perform an OAM F4 end-to-end loopback test. Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test. Press this to perform an OAM F5 end-to-end loopback test. F4 segment F4 end-end F5 segment F5 end-end VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 269 Chapter 36 Diagnostic 270 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide CHAPTER 37 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs Device Access and Login Internet Access Wireless Internet Access USB Device Connection UPnP 37.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure the Device is turned on. 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Device. 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 4 5 Turn the Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 20. 2 3 4 Check the hardware connections. Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. Turn the Device off and on. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 271 Chapter 37 Troubleshooting 5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 37.2 Device Access and Login I forgot the IP address for the Device. 1 2 3 The default LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page 20. I forgot the password. 1 2 The default admin password is 1234. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page 20. I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address (Section 7.2 on page 103), use the new IP address. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the Device. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section 1.5 on page 20. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled. 4 If it is possible to log in from another interface, check the service control settings for HTTP and HTTPS (Maintenance > Remote MGMT). 272 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 37 Troubleshooting 5 6 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Device with the default IP address. See Section 1.6 on page 20. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser. Try to access the Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Device, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the Device does not respond to HTTP. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Device. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default admin password is 1234. The field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 3 4 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Device. Log out of the Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. Turn the Device off and on. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 37.1 on page 271. I cannot Telnet to the Device. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 273 Chapter 37 Troubleshooting 37.3 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 20. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the Network Setting >

Broadband screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure that you enabled the wireless LAN in the Device and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the Device. 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device and reconnect them. 5 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection. 1 Make sure you have the DSL WAN port connected to a telephone jack (or the DSL or modem jack on a splitter if you have one). 2 Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN interface (Network Setting > Broadband screen) with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled. 3 4 Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the DSL connection (Network Setting > Interface Group). If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISPs DHCP server. I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection. ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one type of DSL connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the Device), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 1 Your session with the Device may have expired. Try logging into the Device again. 274 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Chapter 37 Troubleshooting 2 3 4 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 20. Turn the Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. 37.4 Wireless Internet Access What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this problem?

The following factors may cause interference:

Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on. Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs. Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless devices. To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:

Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low. Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones. Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and the wireless client. Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add additional APs if necessary. Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open that use the Internet. What is a Server Set ID (SSID)?

An SSID is a name that uniquely identifies a wireless network. The AP and all the clients within a wireless network must use the same SSID. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 275 Chapter 37 Troubleshooting 37.5 USB Device Connection The Device fails to detect my USB device. 1 Disconnect the USB device. 2 3 4 Reboot the Device. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. Re-connect your USB device to the Device. 37.6 UPnP When using UPnP and the Device reboots, my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh My Network Places > Local Network. 1 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the Devices LAN port or from your computer. 2 Re-connect the Ethernet cable. The Local Area Connection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen. Restart your computer. I cannot open special applications such as white board, file transfer and video when I use the MSN messenger. 1 Wait more than three minutes. 2 Restart the applications. 276 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide APPENDIX A Customer Support In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device. Regional websites are listed below (see also http://www.zyxel.com/

about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml). Please have the following information ready when you contact an office. Required Information Product model and serial number. Warranty Information. Date that you received your device. Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it. Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide) Taiwan ZyXEL Communications Corporation http://www.zyxel.com Asia China ZyXEL Communications (Shanghai) Corp. ZyXEL Communications (Beijing) Corp. ZyXEL Communications (Tianjin) Corp. http://www.zyxel.cn India ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd http://www.zyxel.in Kazakhstan ZyXEL Kazakhstan http://www.zyxel.kz VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 277 Appendix A Customer Support Korea ZyXEL Korea Corp. http://www.zyxel.kr Malaysia ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd. http://www.zyxel.com.my Pakistan ZyXEL Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd. http://www.zyxel.com.pk Philippines ZyXEL Philippines http://www.zyxel.com.ph Singapore ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd. http://www.zyxel.com.sg Taiwan ZyXEL Communications Corporation http://www.zyxel.com Thailand ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd http://www.zyxel.co.th Vietnam ZyXEL Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office http://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi Austria ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH http://www.zyxel.de Belarus ZyXEL BY http://www.zyxel.by Europe 278 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Appendix A Customer Support Belgium ZyXEL Communications B.V. http://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/

Bulgaria ZyXEL http://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/

Czech ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o http://www.zyxel.cz Denmark ZyXEL Communications A/S http://www.zyxel.dk Estonia ZyXEL Estonia http://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/

Finland ZyXEL Communications http://www.zyxel.fi France ZyXEL France http://www.zyxel.fr Germany ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH http://www.zyxel.de Hungary ZyXEL Hungary & SEE http://www.zyxel.hu Latvia ZyXEL Latvia http://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/homepage.shtml VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 279 Appendix A Customer Support Lithuania ZyXEL Lithuania http://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/homepage.shtml Netherlands ZyXEL Benelux http://www.zyxel.nl Norway ZyXEL Communications http://www.zyxel.no Poland ZyXEL Communications Poland http://www.zyxel.pl Romania ZyXEL Romania http://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro Russia ZyXEL Russia http://www.zyxel.ru Slovakia ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka http://www.zyxel.sk Spain ZyXEL Spain http://www.zyxel.es Sweden ZyXEL Communications http://www.zyxel.se Switzerland Studerus AG http://www.zyxel.ch/

280 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Appendix A Customer Support Turkey ZyXEL Turkey A.S. http://www.zyxel.com.tr UK ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd. http://www.zyxel.co.uk Ukraine ZyXEL Ukraine http://www.ua.zyxel.com Latin America Argentina ZyXEL Communication Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/

Ecuador ZyXEL Communication Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/

Middle East Egypt ZyXEL Communication Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml Middle East ZyXEL Communication Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml North America USA ZyXEL Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters http://www.us.zyxel.com/

VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 281 Appendix A Customer Support Oceania Australia ZyXEL Communications Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/au/en/

Africa South Africa Nology (Pty) Ltd. http://www.zyxel.co.za 282 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide APPENDIX B Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2014 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Your use of the Device is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers. Trademarks ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. 1 2 3 4 FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11n (20MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. IEEE 802.11n (40MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 3 through 9. IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. IC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device is designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz networks throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France. Ce produit est conu pour les bandes de frquences 2,4 GHz conformment la lgislation Europenne. En France mtropolitaine, suivant les dcisions n03-908 et 03-909 de lARCEP, la puissance dmission ne devra pas dpasser 10 mW (10 dB) dans le cadre dune installation WiFi en extrieur pour les frquences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483,5 MHz. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 283 Appendix B Legal Information Viewing Certifications Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this products documentation and certifications. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. Open Source Licenses This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. If you cannot find it there, contact your vendor or ZyXEL Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw. To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact your vendor or ZyXEL Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw. Regulatory Information European Union The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union. Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) Compliance Information for Wireless Products Relevant to the EU and Other Countries Following the EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)

[Czech]

[Danish]

[German]

[Estonian]

[English]

[Spanish]

[Greek]

[French]

[Italian]

[Latvian]

ZyXEL tmto prohlauje, e tento zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/EC. Undertegnede ZyXEL erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hiermit erklrt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gert Ausstattung in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. ZyXEL 1999/5/C. Par la prsente ZyXEL dclare que l'appareil quipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC. Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o ZyXEL deklar, ka iekrtas atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem.

[Lithuanian]

iuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad is ranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.

[Dutch]

[Maltese]

Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan tagmir jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.

[Hungarian]

Alulrott, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezs megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EK irnyelv egyb elrsainak. 284 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Appendix B Legal Information

[Polish]

Niniejszym ZyXEL owiadcza, e sprzt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

[Portuguese]

ZyXEL declara que este equipamento est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/EC.

[Slovenian]

ZyXEL izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/EC.

[Slovak]

[Finnish]

[Swedish]

[Bulgarian]

[Icelandic]

[Norwegian]

[Romanian]

ZyXEL tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenia spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL vakuuttaa tten ett laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL , 1999/5/C. Hr me lsir, ZyXEL v yfir a essi bnaur er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og nnur vieigandi kvi tilskipunar 1999/5/EC. Erklrer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 1999/5/EF. Prin prezenta, ZyXEL declar c acest echipament este n conformitate cu cerinele eseniale i alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC. National Restrictions This product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below:

Ce produit peut tre utilis dans tous les pays de lUE (et dans tous les pays ayant transposs la directive 1999/5/CE) sans aucune limitation, except pour les pays mentionns ci-dessous:

Questo prodotto utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU (ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttive EU 1999/5/EC) senza nessuna limitazione, eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito:

Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschrnkungen eingesetzt werden (sowie in anderen Staaten die der EU Direktive 1995/5/CE folgen) mit Aunahme der folgenden aufgefhrten Staaten:

In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2,4-GHz band has been made available for the use of wireless local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries inwhich additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable. The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for 2,4-GHz wireless LANs. The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs:. Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mtres doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples dtails. France For 2.4 GHz, the output power is restricted to 10 mW EIRP when the product is used outdoors in the band 2454 - 2483.5 MHz. There are no restrictions when used indoors or in other parts of the 2.4 GHz band. Check http://www.arcep.fr/ for more details. Pour la bande 2.4 GHz, la puissance est limite 10 mW en p.i.r.e. pour les quipements utiliss en extrieur dans la bande 2454 -

2483.5 MHz. Il n'y a pas de restrictions pour des utilisations en intrieur ou dans d'autres parties de la bande 2.4 GHz. Consultez http://

www.arcep.fr/ pour de plus amples dtails. R&TTE 1999/5/EC WLAN 2.4 2.4835 GHz IEEE 802.11 b/g/n Location Indoor (No restrictions) Outdoor Frequency Range (GHz) 2.4 2.4835 2.4 2.454 2.454 2.4835 Italy This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details. VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 285 Appendix B Legal Information Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una Autorizzazione Generale. Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli. Latvia The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http://

www.esd.lv for more details. 2.4 GHz frekvenu joslas izmantoanai rpus telpm nepiecieama atauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairk informcijas: http://www.esd.lv. Notes:

1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in those countries. 2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used(specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm). List of national codes COUNTRY Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Safety Warnings ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE AT BE CY CR DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IE IT LV LT LU Malta Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Switzerland Bulgaria Romania Turkey MT NL PL PT SK SI ES SE GB IS LI NO CH BG RO TR Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do NOT store things on the device. Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). adaptor or cord. Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source. Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution. Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord. Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged. This product is for indoor use only (utilisation intrieure exclusivement). Do not use this product near water for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from swimming pool. lightning. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. 286 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. Appendix B Legal Information VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 287 Appendix B Legal Information 288 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Index Index Canonical Format Indicator See CFI CCMs 265 certificate factory default 202 certificates 201 authentication 201 CA creating 203 public key 201 replacing 202 storage space 202 Certification Authority 201 Certification Authority. see CA certifications 283 notices 283 viewing 284 CFI 61 CFM 265 CCMs 265 link trace test 265 loopback test 265 MA 265 MD 265 MEP 265 MIP 265 channel, wireless LAN 88 client list 107 compatibility, WDS 82 configuration backup 261 firewalls 185 reset 263 restoring 262 static route 57, 127, 169 Connectivity Check Messages, see CCMs contact information 277 copyright 283 CoS 145 CoS technologies 132 creating certificates 203 CTS threshold 84, 88 289 A ACL rule 189 ACS 245 activation firewalls 185 media server 181 SIP ALG 159 SSID 76 Address Resolution Protocol 229 administrator password 24 AH 215 algorithms 215 applications Internet access 18 media server 180 activation 181 iTunes server 180 applications, NAT 164 ARP Table 229, 231 authentication 88, 89 RADIUS server 90 Auto Configuration Server, see ACS 245 B backup configuration 261 Basic Service Set, see BSS blinking LEDs 20 Broadband 39 broadcast 62 BSS 91 example 91 C CA 201 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide Index customer support 277 D data fragment threshold 84, 88 DDoS 184 default server address 158 Denials of Service, see DoS DH 220 DHCP 102, 121 Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 145 Diffie-Hellman key groups 220 DiffServ 145 marking rule 145 digital IDs 201 disclaimer 283 DLNA 180 DMZ 158 DNS 102, 121 DNS server address assignment 62 documentation related 2 Domain Name 164 Domain Name System, see DNS Domain Name System. See DNS. DoS 184 DS field 145 DS, dee differentiated services DSCP 145 dynamic DNS 167 wildcard 168 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP DYNDNS wildcard 168 E ECHO 164 e-mail log example 257 Encapsulation 58 MER 58 PPP over Ethernet 59 290 encapsulation 40, 216 RFC 1483 59 encryption 90 ESP 215 Extended Service Set IDentification 68, 78 F FCC interference statement 283 File Sharing 178 file sharing 19 filters MAC address 78, 89 Finger 164 firewalls 183 add protocols 185 configuration 185 DDoS 184 DoS 184 LAND attack 184 Ping of Death 184 SYN attack 184 firmware 259 version 37 forwarding ports 150 fragmentation threshold 84, 88 FTP 150, 164 G General wireless LAN screen 66 Guide Quick Start 2 H HTTP 164 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide I IEEE 802.1Q 61 IGA 162 IGMP 62 multicast group list 233 version 62 IKE phases 217 ILA 162 Inside Global Address, see IGA inside header 217 Inside Local Address, see ILA interface group 171 Internet wizard setup 31 Internet access 18 wizard setup 31 Internet Key Exchange 217 Internet Protocol version 6 41 Internet Service Provider, see ISP IP address 102, 122 ping 266 private 122 WAN 40 IP Address Assignment 61 IP alias NAT applications 164 IPSec algorithms 215 architecture 215 NAT 218 IPSec VPN 209 IPv6 41 addressing 41, 62 prefix 41, 63 prefix delegation 42 prefix length 41, 63 ISP 40 iTunes server 180 L LAN 101 and USB printer 181 Index client list 107 DHCP 102, 121 DNS 102, 121 IP address 102, 103, 122 MAC address 107 status 37 subnet mask 102, 103, 122 LAND attack 184 LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration 247 LBR 265 limitations wireless LAN 91 WPS 98 link trace 265 Link Trace Message, see LTM Link Trace Response, see LTR login 23 passwords 23, 24 logs 221, 225, 233, 239, 255 Loop Back Response, see LBR loopback 265 LTM 265 LTR 265 M MA 265 MAC address 79, 107 filter 78, 89 MAC authentication 78 Mac filter 193 Maintenance Association, see MA Maintenance Domain, see MD Maintenance End Point, see MEP managing the device good habits 17 Maximum Burst Size (MBS) 60 MBSSID 91 MD 265 media server 180 activation 181 iTunes server 180 MEP 265 MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 61 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide 291 Index multicast 62 Multiple BSS, see MBSSID multiplexing 59 LLC-based 59 VC-based 59 multiprotocol encapsulation 59 N NAT 149, 151, 161, 162 applications 164 IP alias 164 example 163 global 162 IGA 162 ILA 162 inside 162 IPSec 218 local 162 outside 162 port forwarding 150 port number 164 services 164 SIP ALG 158 activation 159 traversal 219 NAT example 165 negotiation mode 218 Network Address Translation, see NAT Network Map 35 network map 27 NNTP 164 O other documentation 2 outside header 216 P passwords 23, 24 PBC 93 292 Peak Cell Rate (PCR) 60 Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 145 PHB 145 PIN, WPS 94 example 95 Ping of Death 184 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 164 POP3 164 port forwarding 150 ports 20 PPP over Ethernet, see PPPoE PPPoE 40, 59 Benefits 59 PPTP 164 preamble 85, 88 preamble mode 92 prefix delegation 42 pre-shared key 219 Printer Server 181 printer sharing and LAN 181 requirements 181 private IP address 122 product registration 284 protocol 40 push button 21 Push Button Configuration, see PBC push button, WPS 93 Q QoS 131, 145 marking 132 setup 131 tagging 132 versus CoS 132 Quality of Service, see QoS Quick Start Guide 2 R RADIUS server 90 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide registration product 284 related documentation 2 remote management TR-069 245 Remote Procedure Calls, see RPCs 245 reset 20, 263 restart 263 restoring configuration 262 RFC 1058. See RIP. RFC 1389. See RIP. RFC 1483 59 RFC 3164 221 RIP 129 router features 18 Routing Information Protocol. See RIP RPPCs 245 RTS threshold 84, 88 S security wireless LAN 88 Security Log 223 Security Parameter Index, see SPI service access control 243 Service Set 68, 78 Services 164 setup firewalls 185 static route 57, 127, 169 Single Rate Three Color Marker, see srTCM SIP ALG 158 activation 159 SMTP 164 SNMP 164 SNMP trap 164 SPI 184 srTCM 147 SSID 89 activation 76 MBSSID 91 static route 125, 129, 253 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide configuration 57, 127, 169 example 125 static VLAN status 35 firmware version 37 LAN 37 WAN 37 wireless LAN 37 status indicators 20 subnet mask 102, 122 Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) 60 SYN attack 184 syslog protocol 221 severity levels 221 system firmware 259 version 37 passwords 23, 24 reset 20 status 35 LAN 37 WAN 37 wireless LAN 37 time 249 T Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID TCI The 40 thresholds data fragment 84, 88 RTS/CTS 84, 88 time 249 TPID 61 TR-064 247 TR-069 245 ACS setup 245 authentication 246 trademarks 283 traffic shaping 59 transport mode 216 trTCM 147 Index 293 Index tunnel mode 216 Two Rate Three Color Marker, see trTCM U unicast 62 Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP upgrading firmware 259 UPnP 108 cautions 103 example 109 installation 109 NAT traversal 102 USB features 19 V VID Virtual Circuit (VC) 59 Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN VLAN 61 Introduction 61 number of possible VIDs priority frame static VLAN ID 61 VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 61 W WAN status 37 Wide Area Network, see WAN 39 warranty 284 note 284 WDS 82, 92 compatibility 82 example 92 web configurator 23 login 23 passwords 23, 24 294 WEP 90 WEP Encryption 70, 72, 73 WEP encryption 70 WEP key 70 Wireless Distribution System, see WDS wireless LAN 65, 86 authentication 88, 89 BSS 91 example 91 channel 88 encryption 90 example 87 fragmentation threshold 84, 88 limitations 91 MAC address filter 78, 89 MBSSID 91 preamble 85, 88 RADIUS server 90 RTS/CTS threshold 84, 88 security 88 SSID 89 activation 76 status 37 WDS 82, 92 compatibility 82 example 92 WEP 90 WPA 90 WPA-PSK 90 WPS 93, 95 example 96 limitations 98 PIN 94 push button 21, 93 wizard setup Internet 31 WPA 90 WPA-PSK 90 WPS 93, 95 example 96 limitations 98 PIN 94 example 95 push button 21, 93 VMG1312-B10C Users Guide